1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
161 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
162 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
163 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
164 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
168 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
169 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
170 \author 258250489 "eugen"
171 \author 274215730 "scott"
172 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
173 \author 1064312605 "Udi Fogiel"
174 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
175 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
186 by the \SpecialChar LyX
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
193 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
194 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
195 Documentation mailing list:
197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
199 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \begin_inset Newline newline
219 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
221 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
225 \begin_inset Note Note
228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
229 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
230 \begin_inset Newline newline
235 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
245 LatexCommand tableofcontents
252 \begin_layout Chapter
256 \begin_layout Section
257 What is \SpecialChar LyX
261 \begin_layout Standard
263 is a document preparation system.
264 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
267 business letters and proposals,
269 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
273 It is unlike most other
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
282 That means that when you type a section header,
284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 takes care of the typesetting for you;
314 so you deal only with concepts,
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
324 If you haven't read it yet,
330 \begin_layout Standard
335 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
338 the format of all of the manuals.
339 If you don't read it,
340 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
341 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
344 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 Like most applications,
352 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
353 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
354 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
359 This is not a bug or an oversight,
361 When you read a book,
362 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
363 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
364 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
369 The first case is large images.
370 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
371 left click on the image and use the option
382 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
384 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
389 menus and toolbar buttons,
390 have a look at Appendix
395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
397 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
405 \begin_layout Section
409 \begin_layout Standard
410 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
412 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
414 Just select the manual you want to read from the
421 \begin_layout Section
422 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
426 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
435 can be configured via the menu
437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
441 \begin_inset Index idx
446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
453 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
456 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
457 packages are available.
458 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
459 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
460 was installed on your system,
461 you might have some items that you installed locally,
463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
467 \begin_inset space \space{}
470 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
474 To force \SpecialChar LyX
475 to re-inspect your system use
477 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
481 \begin_inset Index idx
486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
487 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
493 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
494 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
497 \begin_layout Section
500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
502 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
509 \begin_layout Standard
510 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
511 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
513 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
514 or print your documents
518 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
519 Some \SpecialChar LyX
520 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
529 which can produce PDFs and the like.
532 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
537 every \SpecialChar LyX
538 document can still be output as plain text
539 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
546 \begin_layout Standard
547 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
549 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
553 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
554 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
557 \begin_layout Standard
558 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
559 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
560 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
562 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
570 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
577 \begin_inset Index idx
582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
583 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
591 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
602 \begin_layout Chapter
603 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
607 \begin_layout Section
608 Basic File Operations
609 \begin_inset Index idx
614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
623 \begin_layout Standard
628 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
631 \begin_layout Itemize
654 \begin_layout Itemize
671 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
677 \begin_layout Itemize
700 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
726 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
743 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
753 \begin_layout Itemize
776 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
811 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
815 \begin_layout Itemize
817 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
825 \begin_layout Itemize
839 \begin_layout Itemize
854 \begin_layout Standard
855 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
856 with a few minor differences.
859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
870 command lists the available templates.
871 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
873 and possibly propose text fragments
877 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
880 you would otherwise need to
881 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
887 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
891 They can be of use for certain classes,
892 especially those for writing letters (see section
897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
899 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
906 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
907 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
910 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
918 \begin_layout Standard
919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
952 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
953 to open a file or create a new one,
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
960 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
965 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
977 \begin_layout Standard
999 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
1001 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1004 people work on the same document at the same time.
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1009 If you plan to do this,
1010 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1012 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1017 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1018 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1020 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1022 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1028 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1037 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1050 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1070 will reload the document from disk.
1071 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1072 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1084 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1085 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1089 \begin_layout Section
1091 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1094 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1099 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1104 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1106 lays much stress on safety.
1107 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1108 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1110 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1112 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1113 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1114 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1117 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1118 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1119 does not simply make a backup file,
1120 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1121 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1122 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1123 \begin_inset space ~
1127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1129 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1134 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1137 \begin_layout Standard
1139 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1141 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1144 \begin_layout Subsection
1146 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1150 \begin_layout Standard
1152 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1155 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1157 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1171 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1176 in preferences (see section
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1183 reference "sec:Paths"
1192 then all backups are stored there.
1193 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1194 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1195 but also the path in their name,
1197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1211 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1216 \begin_layout Standard
1218 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1219 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1220 and you need to enable
1221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1228 in order to see them.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1233 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1234 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1235 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1237 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1240 \begin_layout Subsection
1242 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1246 \begin_layout Standard
1248 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1251 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1259 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1264 As opposed to the backup files,
1265 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1268 \begin_layout Standard
1270 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1271 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1290 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1296 with all changes saved.
1297 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1302 program crash or power outage),
1303 and this is when they might become useful.
1306 \begin_layout Subsection
1308 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1312 \begin_layout Standard
1314 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1316 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1317 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1318 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1319 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1322 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1325 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 myfile.lyx.emergency
1339 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1341 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1344 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1345 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1348 \begin_layout Subsection
1350 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1351 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1355 \begin_layout Standard
1357 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1358 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1359 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1361 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1364 keeps a copy of the old version,
1367 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1370 where <n> is the old format (e.
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1377 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1380 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1381 that is alongside the original document or,
1383 in the backup directory.
1386 \begin_layout Standard
1388 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1389 As with backup files,
1390 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1394 \begin_layout Subsection
1396 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1397 When to Use Which File?
1400 \begin_layout Standard
1402 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1403 Now why all these files?
1404 Because they have different purposes.
1408 \begin_layout Standard
1410 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1412 terminates unexpectedly,
1415 \begin_layout Enumerate
1417 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1418 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1420 This file has the latest changes,
1421 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1424 \begin_layout Enumerate
1426 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1427 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1434 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1436 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1437 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1439 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1442 \begin_layout Enumerate
1444 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1445 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1446 use the backup file.
1447 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1448 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1449 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1454 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1455 The fourth type of file,
1456 the backup file from old versions,
1457 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1460 \begin_layout Standard
1462 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1463 So much for the safety net.
1464 We hope you will not need it,
1466 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1467 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1472 \begin_layout Section
1473 Basic Editing Features
1474 \begin_inset Index idx
1479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1488 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1495 \begin_layout Standard
1496 Like most modern word processors,
1498 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1499 can move by character,
1502 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1503 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1504 editing features and how to access them.
1505 We will start with cut and paste.
1508 \begin_layout Standard
1509 As you might expect,
1514 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1515 along with various other editing features.
1516 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1520 \begin_layout Itemize
1526 \begin_inset Index idx
1531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1561 \begin_layout Itemize
1567 \begin_inset Index idx
1572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 \begin_inset Index idx
1613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1643 \begin_inset space ~
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1653 \begin_inset space ~
1659 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1667 \begin_inset space ~
1673 \begin_inset Index idx
1678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1708 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1718 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1725 The first three are self-explanatory.
1726 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1727 and other programs using
1749 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1754 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1755 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1756 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1757 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1761 \begin_inset space ~
1766 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1767 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1770 \begin_layout Standard
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1779 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1780 Possible formats include HTML,
1785 \begin_inset space ~
1792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1801 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1807 \begin_inset space \space{}
1810 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1817 \begin_inset space ~
1820 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1822 \begin_inset space ~
1826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1839 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1840 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1841 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1851 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1852 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1877 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1880 paste from the primary selection.
1881 This is normally the currently selected text.
1884 \begin_layout Standard
1887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1911 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1913 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1917 Once you have found a word or expression,
1921 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1926 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1974 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1978 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1995 arg "word-find-backward"
1998 shortcut) to search backwards
2002 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
2003 Even if you close the widget,
2013 arg "word-find-backward"
2016 will search further.
2021 \begin_layout Standard
2023 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2028 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2036 field and searches the next match.
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2047 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2049 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2051 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2057 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2059 the following options are available:
2062 \begin_layout Itemize
2065 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2077 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2080 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2081 If the toggle is set,
2083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2094 will not match the word
2095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2112 \begin_layout Itemize
2115 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2119 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2123 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2128 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2129 to only find complete words,
2131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2135 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2165 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2172 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2177 will limit search and replace,
2179 to the current cursor selection.
2182 \begin_layout Itemize
2185 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2190 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2191 without pressing the
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_layout Itemize
2204 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2209 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2210 If this is not checked,
2211 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2212 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2213 so you need to put it back manually.
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2217 \paragraph_spacing single
2219 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2220 The widget also has a
2224 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2225 hiding replace and options.
2228 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2230 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2235 button brings you back to the full size.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 \paragraph_spacing single
2242 also offers an advanced
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2249 \begin_inset space ~
2254 feature that is described in section
2255 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2261 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2269 \begin_layout Standard
2273 \begin_inset space \space{}
2277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2285 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2286 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2290 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2297 \begin_layout Standard
2301 arg "inset-select-all"
2304 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2305 When the cursor is inside an inset
2308 arg "inset-select-all"
2311 selects the content of the inset.
2315 arg "inset-select-all"
2318 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2322 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2325 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2328 \begin_layout Section
2330 \begin_inset Index idx
2335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2356 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2363 \begin_layout Standard
2364 If you make a mistake,
2365 you can easily recover from it.
2367 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2370 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2373 or the toolbar button
2380 If you accidentally undo too much,
2383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2386 or the toolbar button
2393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2404 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2407 \begin_layout Standard
2409 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2410 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2420 This is a consequence of the 100
2421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2424 step undo limit mentioned above.
2427 \begin_layout Standard
2436 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2438 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2439 but by blocks of text.
2442 \begin_layout Section
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2458 \begin_layout Standard
2459 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2462 \begin_layout Enumerate
2467 \begin_layout Itemize
2472 once anywhere in the edit window.
2473 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2477 \begin_layout Enumerate
2482 \begin_layout Itemize
2489 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2496 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2498 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2499 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2504 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2515 \begin_layout Enumerate
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2525 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2529 \begin_layout Section
2531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2533 name "sec:Navigating"
2538 \begin_inset Index idx
2543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2554 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2557 \begin_layout Itemize
2562 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2565 \begin_layout Itemize
2567 which is accessed either by the menu
2569 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2576 or by the toolbar button
2579 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2585 \begin_layout Itemize
2586 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2588 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2591 and use the same menu to return to them.
2592 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2599 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2604 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2605 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2607 \begin_inset space ~
2612 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2613 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2616 \begin_layout Standard
2621 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2625 \begin_layout Subsection
2627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2629 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2641 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Index idx
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2670 \begin_layout Standard
2671 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2673 labels and cross-references (see section
2674 \begin_inset space ~
2678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2680 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2687 or citations (see section
2688 \begin_inset space ~
2692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2694 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2700 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2705 For example with citations,
2706 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2714 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2716 if you are displaying the list of
2718 Labels and References
2720 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2721 you can enter the text
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2738 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2739 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2744 option keeps it in the current view state.
2745 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2749 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2750 \begin_inset space ~
2754 the subsections of sections
2755 \begin_inset space ~
2758 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2763 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2769 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2788 button refreshes the TOC (
2789 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2795 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2797 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2801 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2805 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2809 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2813 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2819 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2821 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2825 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2835 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2837 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2845 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2853 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2857 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2861 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2865 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2869 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2871 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2875 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2890 you can move section
2891 \begin_inset space ~
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2898 2.4 or after section
2899 \begin_inset space ~
2904 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2917 (or the corresponding key bindings
2925 ) you can change the level of sections.
2926 You can make section
2927 \begin_inset space ~
2931 \begin_inset space ~
2935 \begin_inset space ~
2941 \begin_layout Standard
2942 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2946 \begin_layout Subsection
2947 Horizontal Scrolling
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2965 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2984 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2985 \begin_inset space ~
2988 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2989 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2998 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 is used on a small tablet computer
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3004 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3016 \begin_inset space ~
3029 \begin_layout Itemize
3030 Math constructs with long command names
3033 \begin_layout Standard
3034 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3035 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3036 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3037 window so that table
3038 \begin_inset space ~
3042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3050 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3054 \begin_layout Standard
3055 \begin_inset Float table
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3072 Horizontal scrolling test.
3080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3082 \begin_inset Tabular
3083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3129 \begin_layout Section
3130 Input/Word Completion
3131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3138 \begin_inset Index idx
3143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 \begin_inset Index idx
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3188 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3189 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3192 \begin_layout Standard
3193 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3196 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3201 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3208 \begin_inset space ~
3212 \begin_inset space ~
3217 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3221 \begin_inset space ~
3226 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3227 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3230 \begin_inset space ~
3236 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3237 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3240 \begin_layout Standard
3242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3247 key to accept a proposed completion.
3248 If several completions are possible,
3249 a popup is opened showing them.
3250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3251 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3255 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3265 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3268 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3270 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3273 he special math option
3277 enables characters to be composed.
3279 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3282 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3287 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3290 you want to insert the character
3291 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3296 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3299 input the characters
3300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3312 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3314 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3318 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3320 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3325 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3327 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3330 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3332 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3334 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3337 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3342 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3344 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3348 's installation folder.
3350 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3351 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3357 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3362 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3363 In the example above,
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3402 \begin_layout Section
3404 \begin_inset Index idx
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 \begin_inset Index idx
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 \begin_layout Standard
3463 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3479 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3482 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3486 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3487 \begin_inset space ~
3491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3493 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3501 \begin_layout Standard
3506 \begin_inset space ~
3515 \begin_inset space ~
3540 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3544 \begin_layout Labeling
3545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3549 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3550 LatexCommand nomenclature
3552 description "Tabulator key"
3559 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3561 If you do not understand this,
3563 \begin_inset space ~
3567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3569 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3577 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3584 \begin_inset space ~
3588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3590 reference "subsec:Lists"
3599 If you are still confused,
3605 \begin_inset Newline newline
3613 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3614 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3617 \begin_layout Labeling
3618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3622 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3623 LatexCommand nomenclature
3625 description "Escape key"
3633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3642 to cancel operations.
3643 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3646 \begin_layout Labeling
3647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3652 These move the cursor,
3654 to the beginning and end of a line,
3655 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 There are three modifier keys:
3662 \begin_layout Labeling
3663 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3681 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3682 LatexCommand nomenclature
3684 description "Control key"
3689 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3693 \begin_layout Itemize
3703 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3706 \begin_layout Itemize
3716 it moves by words instead of characters.
3719 \begin_layout Itemize
3729 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3734 \begin_layout Labeling
3735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3754 LatexCommand nomenclature
3756 description "Shift key"
3761 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3764 \begin_layout Labeling
3765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3784 LatexCommand nomenclature
3786 description "Alt or Meta key"
3791 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3792 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3793 If you have both keys,
3794 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3799 \begin_inset Newline newline
3802 This key does many different things,
3803 but it also activates the
3805 menu accelerator keys
3808 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3809 it selects that menu item.
3813 \begin_layout Standard
3816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3822 \begin_inset space ~
3826 \begin_inset space ~
3832 \begin_inset space ~
3840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3880 manual lists all other things bound to the
3888 \begin_layout Standard
3889 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3890 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3891 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3893 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3894 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3895 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3912 followed by a capital
3919 \begin_layout Chapter
3922 \begin_inset Index idx
3927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Section
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3973 \begin_layout Subsection
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3978 Before you do anything else,
3979 before you ever start writing a document,
3980 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3981 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3986 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3987 and format the title of your document differently.
3990 \begin_layout Standard
3995 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3996 By setting the document class,
3997 you automatically select these properties,
3998 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3999 If you don't choose a document class,
4001 picks one for you by default.
4002 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4005 \begin_layout Subsection
4007 \begin_inset Index idx
4012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4031 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4038 \begin_layout Standard
4039 You can select a class using the
4041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 Select the class you want to use,
4069 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4076 \begin_layout Standard
4077 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4082 \begin_layout Description
4083 Article for basic articles
4086 \begin_layout Description
4087 Report for basic reports
4090 \begin_layout Description
4091 Book for writing a book
4094 \begin_layout Description
4095 Letter for US-style letters
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 There are also some non-standard classes,
4100 which \SpecialChar LyX
4101 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4103 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4104 distributions will include many of these.
4105 Here are some of the classes.
4106 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4108 Special Document Classes
4117 \begin_layout Description
4118 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4121 \begin_layout Description
4122 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4125 \begin_layout Description
4126 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4129 \begin_layout Description
4130 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4131 There are three article layouts available.
4132 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4133 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4134 All result-type statements (propositions,
4136 and so on) are sequenced together,
4139 and the like have their own sequence.
4141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4144 sequential numbering
4145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4148 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4149 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4150 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4151 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4154 \begin_layout Description
4155 Beamer Layout for presentations
4158 \begin_layout Description
4159 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4160 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4162 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4166 \begin_layout Description
4167 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4170 \begin_layout Description
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4175 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4178 \begin_layout Description
4179 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4182 \begin_layout Description
4183 Foils Used to make transparencies
4186 \begin_layout Description
4187 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4188 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4190 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4194 \begin_layout Description
4195 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4198 \begin_layout Description
4199 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4202 \begin_layout Description
4203 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4206 \begin_layout Description
4207 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4208 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4209 automatic print space calculation etc.
4210 (Is used by this document.)
4213 \begin_layout Description
4214 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4217 \begin_layout Description
4218 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4221 \begin_layout Description
4226 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4227 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4228 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4229 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4233 \begin_layout Description
4234 Slides Used to make transparencies
4237 \begin_layout Description
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4242 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4245 \begin_layout Description
4246 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4250 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4251 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4253 Special Document Classes
4261 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4269 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4307 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4308 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4314 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4321 are highly specialized.
4323 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4324 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4325 with a growing number.
4326 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4327 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4328 There are just too many of them.
4329 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4332 \begin_layout Standard
4333 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4342 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4343 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4345 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4348 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4355 manual for information on how to install them.
4356 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4364 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4365 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4367 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4368 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4369 The \SpecialChar LyX
4370 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4373 users can write their own layout files,
4374 and many users have done so.
4377 Installing New Document Classes,
4385 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4392 name "subsec:Modules"
4397 \begin_inset Index idx
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4422 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4423 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4424 This is not available in any document class,
4425 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4460 \begin_layout Standard
4461 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4462 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4464 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4465 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4466 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4467 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4468 since \SpecialChar LyX
4469 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4470 file without the missing prerequisites.
4471 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4472 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4496 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4500 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4511 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4522 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4535 Some modules require other modules,
4536 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4538 will advise you about these things.
4546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4550 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4580 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4581 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4584 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4585 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4588 a particular document has very special needs,
4589 but you need a specific inset or
4590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4592 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4595 style only that one time.
4596 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4598 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4616 manual for information on how to use it.
4619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4624 Each class has a default set of options.
4625 Here's a quick table describing them:
4628 \begin_layout Standard
4629 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4635 \begin_layout Standard
4637 \begin_inset Tabular
4638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4639 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5098 \begin_layout Standard
5099 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 You're probably also wondering what
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset space ~
5115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5119 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5120 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5126 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5131 Some document classes,
5132 such as the ones for letters,
5133 don't use any section headings.
5154 We will describe these headings fully in section
5155 \begin_inset space ~
5159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5161 reference "subsec:Headings"
5169 \begin_layout Subsection
5171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5173 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5200 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5242 \begin_inset space ~
5248 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5249 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5250 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5251 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5252 -class and its options,
5253 you have to read its manual.
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5262 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5266 \begin_inset space ~
5273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5279 \begin_inset space ~
5284 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5285 You can choose between the following five options:
5288 \begin_layout Labeling
5289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5294 Use default page style of current class.
5297 \begin_layout Labeling
5298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5303 No page numbers or headings.
5306 \begin_layout Labeling
5307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5315 \begin_layout Labeling
5316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5321 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5322 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5323 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5326 \begin_layout Labeling
5327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5332 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5338 \begin_inset Index idx
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5361 How they are defined is explained in section
5362 \begin_inset space ~
5366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5368 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5378 \begin_inset space ~
5382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5384 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5392 \begin_layout Subsection
5393 Paper Size and Orientation
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5418 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 You can find the following options in the menu
5429 \begin_inset space ~
5436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5440 \begin_inset Index idx
5445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5464 \begin_layout Labeling
5465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5469 \begin_inset space ~
5474 What size paper to print on.
5479 \begin_layout Itemize
5485 \begin_layout Itemize
5491 \begin_layout Itemize
5497 \begin_layout Itemize
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5511 \begin_layout Itemize
5517 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Labeling
5525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5530 To choose whether to output as
5541 \begin_layout Labeling
5542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5546 \begin_inset space ~
5551 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5552 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5555 \begin_layout Subsection
5557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5559 name "subsec:Margins"
5564 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5586 \begin_inset Index idx
5591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 Paper margins are set in the menu
5603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5631 \begin_layout Standard
5632 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5633 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5636 \begin_layout Subsection
5640 \begin_layout Standard
5641 If you change a document class,
5643 has to convert everything into the new class.
5644 That includes the paragraph environments.
5645 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5646 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5647 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5648 If this is the case,
5649 and you change the document class,
5651 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5660 The name of the style is retained,
5661 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5662 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5663 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5666 \begin_layout Section
5667 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5668 \begin_inset Index idx
5673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5692 \begin_layout Subsection
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5696 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5705 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5708 \begin_layout Standard
5709 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5710 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5711 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5712 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5716 paragraph of a section,
5727 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5728 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5730 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5733 \begin_layout Standard
5734 The space between paragraphs,
5735 like the line spacing,
5736 the space between headings and text —
5738 all the spacing for just about everything —
5739 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5742 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5746 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5749 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5750 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5757 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5758 goes to produce a printable file.
5764 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5766 gives you the ability globally to change
5770 these pre-coded spacings.
5771 We will explain more later.
5774 \begin_layout Subsection
5775 Paragraph Separation
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5778 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5783 \begin_inset Index idx
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5807 \begin_layout Standard
5815 \begin_inset space ~
5823 \begin_inset space ~
5830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5834 \begin_inset Index idx
5839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5855 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5859 \begin_layout Subsection
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5864 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5869 \begin_inset space ~
5874 dialog and toggle the
5877 \begin_inset space ~
5882 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5885 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5889 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5890 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5893 \begin_layout Standard
5894 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5897 \begin_layout Subsection
5899 \begin_inset Index idx
5904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5906 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5930 \begin_inset Index idx
5935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset space ~
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5992 installed to use this feature.
5997 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6001 \begin_inset space ~
6006 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6009 \begin_layout Section
6010 Paragraph Environments
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6018 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6040 \begin_inset Index idx
6045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6046 Paragraph environments
6054 \begin_layout Subsection
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6071 } \SpecialChar ldots
6081 \begin_inset Newline newline
6084 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6086 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6088 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6089 we urge you to read the
6098 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 A paragraph environment is simply a
6103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6110 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6111 This can include a particular style of font,
6118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6125 the different environments inside one another,
6126 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6127 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6128 on the fly margin adjustment,
6129 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6130 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6131 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6135 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6136 use the pull-down box
6137 \begin_inset Graphics
6138 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6144 at the left end of the toolbar.
6146 will change the environment of the
6150 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6151 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6154 \begin_layout Standard
6163 create a new paragraph using the
6167 paragraph environment.
6169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6176 because if you are in one of these environments:
6179 \begin_layout Itemize
6185 \begin_layout Itemize
6191 \begin_layout Itemize
6197 \begin_layout Itemize
6203 \begin_layout Itemize
6209 \begin_layout Itemize
6215 \begin_layout Itemize
6221 \begin_layout Standard
6223 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6228 rather than resetting it to
6233 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6234 \begin_inset space ~
6238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6240 reference "sec:Nesting"
6248 \begin_layout Subsection
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 The default paragraph environment is
6258 It creates a plain paragraph.
6260 resets the paragraph environment,
6261 this is the one it chooses.
6263 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6270 \begin_layout Standard
6271 You can nest a paragraph using the
6275 environment in just about anything else,
6276 but you can't really nest anything in a
6283 \begin_layout Subsection
6285 \begin_inset Index idx
6290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6309 \begin_layout Standard
6310 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6311 title page has three parts:
6313 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 for thanks or contact information.
6322 For certain types of documents,
6324 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6325 For other types of documents,
6327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6334 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6337 \begin_layout Standard
6339 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6354 Here's how you use them:
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Put the title of your document in the
6365 \begin_layout Itemize
6366 Put the author name in the
6373 \begin_layout Itemize
6374 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6375 want to use a fixed date,
6376 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6377 put that text in the
6382 Note that using this environment is optional.
6383 If you don't provide any,
6385 will automatically insert today's date.
6386 If you don't want a date,
6389 Suppress default date on front page
6393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6396 \begin_inset space ~
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 You can use footnotes to insert
6406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6413 or contact information.
6416 \begin_layout Subsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6432 name "subsec:Headings"
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6440 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6442 takes care of the numbering for you.
6445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6447 \begin_inset Index idx
6452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 \begin_layout Standard
6472 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6476 \begin_layout Enumerate
6482 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6494 \begin_layout Enumerate
6500 \begin_layout Enumerate
6506 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 \begin_layout Enumerate
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6520 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6521 separated by periods.
6522 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6523 Unlike the other headings,
6524 parts are numbered with
6525 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6527 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6529 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6535 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6538 suppose you're writing a book.
6539 You group the book into chapters.
6541 does a similar grouping:
6544 \begin_layout Itemize
6549 is divided into either
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6572 \begin_layout Itemize
6584 \begin_layout Itemize
6596 \begin_layout Itemize
6608 \begin_layout Itemize
6620 \begin_layout Standard
6621 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 Not all document types use the
6634 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6639 is the top-level heading.
6647 \begin_layout Standard
6653 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6655 labels it with its number,
6656 along with the number of the subsection,
6659 chapter that it's in.
6661 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6699 The unnumbered section headings have a
6700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6707 at the end of their name.
6708 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6710 \begin_inset space ~
6714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6725 Changing the Numbering
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6728 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6735 \begin_layout Standard
6736 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6738 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6739 that's preset in the document class.
6740 Just as certain classes start with
6755 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6765 This is something you can change.
6768 \begin_layout Standard
6771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6775 \begin_inset Index idx
6780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6799 \begin_inset space ~
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6808 you will see two counters.
6813 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6814 numbers a section heading.
6815 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6819 Short Titles of Headings
6820 \begin_inset Index idx
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 \begin_inset Argument 1
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6854 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 Some section or chapter titles,
6865 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6867 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6868 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6873 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6874 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6875 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6876 To specify a short title,
6877 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6881 \begin_inset space ~
6887 This will insert a box labeled
6888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6899 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6900 This also works for captions inside floats.
6901 There can only be one short title per title.
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6905 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6912 \begin_layout Standard
6913 The following information applies to all section headings:
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6917 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6925 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6928 \begin_layout Itemize
6929 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6932 \begin_layout Subsection
6936 \begin_layout Standard
6938 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6954 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6955 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6956 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6957 They also allow nesting,
6967 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6970 \begin_layout Standard
6971 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6980 when you start a new paragraph.
6982 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6986 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6989 once you are done typing in that poem,
6990 you have to change back to the
6994 environment yourself.
6997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7006 \begin_inset Index idx
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7021 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7022 it's time for the differences.
7031 are identical except for one difference:
7036 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7045 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Here's an example of the
7063 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7064 See – no indentation!
7068 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7070 there's no indentation,
7071 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7075 Here's another example,
7083 \begin_layout Quotation
7090 you will see the indentation.
7091 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7096 is the environment for you!
7102 you were quoting other text.
7105 \begin_layout Quotation
7106 Here's a new paragraph.
7107 I could ramble on and on,
7108 like a politician at election time.
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7115 As the examples show,
7120 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7121 They should put quotes in the
7126 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7130 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7135 \begin_inset Index idx
7140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7183 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7192 \begin_inset Newline newline
7195 Which I did not rehearse!
7199 It could be much worse.
7200 This line could be long,
7203 so very long that it wraps around.
7204 It looks okay on screen,
7205 but in the printed version,
7206 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7208 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7217 And make things look fine
7218 \begin_inset Newline newline
7224 arg "newline-insert newline"
7230 \begin_layout Standard
7236 does not indent both margins.
7237 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7238 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7242 arg "newline-insert newline"
7248 \begin_layout Subsection
7250 \begin_inset Index idx
7255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7273 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7284 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7296 lets you provide your own label.
7297 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7308 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7317 reset the environment to
7321 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7322 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7323 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7327 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7331 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7332 it returns you to the
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7343 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7344 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7345 we suggest you read all of section
7346 \begin_inset space ~
7350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7352 reference "sec:Nesting"
7360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7362 \begin_inset Index idx
7367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7393 \begin_layout Standard
7394 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7398 paragraph environment.
7399 It has the following properties:
7402 \begin_layout Itemize
7403 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7407 \begin_layout Itemize
7409 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7412 \begin_layout Itemize
7413 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7417 \begin_layout Itemize
7418 The items can have any length.
7420 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7421 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7428 \begin_layout Itemize
7433 environment inside another
7438 the label changes to a new symbol.
7442 \begin_layout Itemize
7443 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7446 \begin_layout Itemize
7448 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7451 \begin_layout Itemize
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7459 reference "sec:Nesting"
7464 for a full explanation of nesting.
7468 \begin_layout Standard
7470 that explanation was also an example of an
7479 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7484 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7487 \begin_layout Itemize
7488 The label for the first level
7492 is a large black dot,
7497 \begin_layout Itemize
7498 The label for the second level is a dash.
7502 \begin_layout Itemize
7503 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7507 \begin_layout Itemize
7508 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7512 \begin_layout Itemize
7513 Back out to the third level.
7517 \begin_layout Itemize
7518 Back to the second level.
7522 \begin_layout Itemize
7523 Back to the outermost level.
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7527 These are the default labels for an
7532 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7537 dialog in the submenu
7542 \begin_inset Index idx
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7567 \begin_layout Standard
7568 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7569 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7576 reference "sec:Nesting"
7584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7586 \begin_inset Index idx
7591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7610 name "sec:Enumerate"
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7622 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7623 It has these properties:
7626 \begin_layout Enumerate
7627 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7631 \begin_layout Enumerate
7632 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7636 \begin_layout Enumerate
7638 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7641 \begin_layout Enumerate
7646 environment resets the counter to one.
7649 \begin_layout Enumerate
7663 \begin_layout Enumerate
7664 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7665 Items can have any length.
7668 \begin_layout Enumerate
7669 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7672 \begin_layout Enumerate
7673 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7676 \begin_layout Enumerate
7677 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7681 \begin_layout Standard
7691 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7693 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7694 labels the four different levels in an
7701 \begin_layout Enumerate
7702 The first level of an
7706 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7710 \begin_layout Enumerate
7711 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7715 \begin_layout Enumerate
7716 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7720 \begin_layout Enumerate
7721 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7724 \begin_layout Enumerate
7726 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 Back to the third level
7735 \begin_layout Enumerate
7736 Back to the second level.
7740 \begin_layout Enumerate
7741 Back to the outermost level.
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7745 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7751 \begin_inset space ~
7755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7757 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7763 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7764 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 There is more to nesting
7773 environments than we've stated here.
7774 You should read section
7775 \begin_inset space ~
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7781 reference "sec:Nesting"
7786 to learn more about nesting.
7789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7791 \begin_inset Index idx
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7815 \begin_layout Standard
7816 Unlike the previous two environments,
7821 list has no fixed label.
7825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7832 of the first line as the label.
7836 \begin_layout Description
7838 This is an example of the
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7847 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7850 \begin_layout Standard
7852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7859 it is meant that the first usage of the
7863 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7864 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7865 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7869 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7878 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7886 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_inset space ~
7903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7905 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7910 for more information.) Here is an example:
7913 \begin_layout Description
7915 \begin_inset space ~
7919 This one shows how to use a
7920 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7924 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7928 \begin_inset space ~
7940 \begin_layout Description
7946 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7947 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7948 It's not a good idea to use a
7952 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7953 You're better off using
7965 paragraphs into them.
7968 \begin_layout Description
7974 environments inside one another,
7975 nest them in other types of lists,
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 Notice that after the first line,
7982 indents subsequent lines,
7983 offsetting them from the first line.
7986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7988 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8017 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8022 \begin_layout Standard
8031 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8032 Here are its properties:
8035 \begin_layout Labeling
8036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8038 \begin_inset space ~
8041 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8050 of each line as the item label.
8055 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8056 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8058 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8060 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8063 space as described above.
8066 \begin_layout Labeling
8067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8068 margins As you can see,
8070 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8071 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8072 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8075 \begin_layout Labeling
8076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8078 \begin_inset space ~
8081 width \SpecialChar LyX
8082 uses the width of the label,
8083 or the default width,
8085 If the label width is larger,
8087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8094 into the first line.
8096 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8099 \begin_layout Labeling
8100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8105 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8109 environment has the same left margin.
8110 \begin_inset Newline newline
8113 To change the default width,
8114 select all items in the list.
8117 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8119 \begin_inset space ~
8124 dialog (toolbar button
8127 arg "layout-paragraph"
8134 \begin_inset space ~
8139 determines the default label width.
8140 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8141 but you can also use the letter
8142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8149 multiple times instead.
8150 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8160 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8163 \begin_inset space ~
8168 every time you alter a label in a
8173 \begin_inset Newline newline
8176 The predefined default width is the length of
8177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8196 list the same way as the
8201 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8206 environment gives you another way to do this,
8207 using a different overall layout.
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8215 lists inside one another,
8216 nest them in other types of lists,
8218 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8220 \begin_inset space ~
8224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8226 reference "sec:Nesting"
8231 to learn about nesting.
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8235 There is yet another feature of the
8240 As you can see in the examples,
8242 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8243 You can use additional
8246 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8251 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8252 justifies the item label.
8256 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8258 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8260 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8265 are documented in section
8266 \begin_inset space ~
8270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8272 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8278 Here are some examples:
8281 \begin_layout Labeling
8282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8283 Left The default for
8290 \begin_layout Labeling
8291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8298 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8303 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8306 \begin_layout Labeling
8307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8312 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8318 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8323 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8326 \begin_layout Subsection
8328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8330 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8335 \begin_inset Index idx
8340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 The features described in this section require that the module
8362 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8364 is loaded in the document settings.
8365 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8371 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8397 Custom Enumerate Lists
8398 \begin_inset Index idx
8403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8405 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8432 \begin_layout Standard
8434 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8439 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8440 There you add the command
8443 \begin_layout Standard
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8464 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8473 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8487 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8494 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8495 For capital Roman numerals replace
8507 in the command above.
8508 For Arabic numerals use
8516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8523 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8550 You can only number 26
8551 \begin_inset space ~
8554 items with Latin letters,
8555 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8565 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8571 \begin_layout Standard
8572 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8575 \begin_layout Enumerate
8576 \begin_inset Argument 1
8579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 \begin_inset Argument 1
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 \begin_layout Enumerate
8638 \begin_inset Argument 1
8641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8665 \begin_layout Enumerate
8666 \begin_inset Argument 1
8669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 For this list these commands were used:
8699 \begin_layout Standard
8710 \begin_inset Newline newline
8718 \begin_inset Newline newline
8726 \begin_inset Newline newline
8736 \begin_layout Standard
8743 makes the label emphasized and
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8762 When you change the label of a list level,
8763 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8773 \begin_inset Index idx
8778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8808 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8811 \begin_layout Enumerate
8812 \begin_inset Argument 1
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 \begin_inset Note Note
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8838 goes back to default numbering
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 To resume an enumeration,
8866 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8867 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8868 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8885 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8886 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8897 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8898 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8903 \begin_layout Standard
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8914 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Enumerate
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8930 \begin_layout Enumerate
8931 \begin_inset Argument 1
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8950 This enumeration starts at 4
8953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8955 \begin_inset Index idx
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8981 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 with standard spacing
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8994 Add there the command
8998 to get no additional list space like in this example:
9001 \begin_layout Itemize
9002 \begin_inset Argument 1
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Itemize
9032 \begin_layout Standard
9033 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9039 \begin_inset Index idx
9044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 For more information see its documentation,
9064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9076 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9080 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
9084 \begin_inset Argument 1
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 \begin_layout Enumerate
9110 with negative indentation
9113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9114 Further Customization
9115 \begin_inset Index idx
9120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9139 \begin_layout Standard
9140 You can also change the style of description lists.
9144 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 changes the description label font,
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 sets the list style.
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 An example where the command
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9182 \begin_layout Description
9184 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_inset Argument 1
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9213 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9214 therefore ionizing them.
9217 \begin_layout Description
9219 \begin_inset space ~
9223 In computer science,
9224 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9226 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9228 disk space or other resource.
9231 \begin_layout Standard
9232 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9238 \begin_inset Index idx
9243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 For more information see its documentation
9262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9272 \begin_layout Subsection
9274 \begin_inset Index idx
9279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9290 \begin_inset space ~
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9299 has document classes for letters,
9300 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9307 \begin_inset space ~
9313 To use the letter class,
9314 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9315 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9316 gags on the document.
9325 \begin_inset space ~
9330 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9331 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9332 though you can't nest anything in them.
9335 \begin_layout Standard
9337 you're not limited to using
9344 \begin_inset space ~
9353 \begin_inset space ~
9360 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9367 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9379 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9380 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9385 \begin_inset space ~
9390 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9391 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9392 Here's an example of each:
9395 \begin_layout Right Address
9397 \begin_inset Newline newline
9401 \begin_inset Newline newline
9405 \begin_inset Newline newline
9412 \begin_layout Standard
9416 \begin_inset space ~
9422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9423 which \SpecialChar LyX
9424 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9425 Here's an example of the
9432 \begin_layout Address
9434 \begin_inset Newline newline
9437 Where do I send this
9438 \begin_inset Newline newline
9441 Your post office and country
9444 \begin_layout Standard
9453 \begin_inset space ~
9458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9463 in either of these environments,
9465 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9480 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9489 arg "newline-insert newline"
9494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9497 \begin_inset space ~
9501 \begin_inset space ~
9506 ) to start a new line in an
9513 \begin_inset space ~
9521 \begin_layout Subsection
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9528 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9533 \begin_inset Index idx
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9547 \begin_layout Standard
9552 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9554 you could use this environment anywhere,
9555 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9558 don't bother trying to nest
9562 in anything else or vice versa.
9568 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9569 The book document classes ignores the
9574 and it's utterly silly to use
9578 in a letter document class.
9581 \begin_layout Standard
9586 environment does several things for you.
9588 it puts the centered label
9589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9597 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9599 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9600 just as you'd expect.
9602 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9604 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9609 \begin_layout Standard
9610 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9614 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9615 The new paragraph will still be in the
9621 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9624 \begin_layout Standard
9625 \begin_inset Float figure
9632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9634 \begin_inset Graphics
9635 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9643 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9648 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9669 \begin_layout Standard
9670 We would love to demonstrate the
9675 but since this document is in the
9676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9685 We inserted it therefore as figure
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9692 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9698 If you have never heard of an
9699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9707 you can safely ignore this environment.
9710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9712 \begin_inset Index idx
9717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9726 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9738 environment is used to list references.
9740 you could use this environment anywhere,
9741 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9753 \begin_layout Standard
9754 When you first open a
9760 adds a large vertical space,
9761 followed by the heading
9762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9777 depending on the document class.
9778 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9779 Each paragraph of the
9783 environment is a bibliography entry.
9789 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9790 Each new paragraph is still in the
9797 \begin_layout Standard
9799 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9801 For more information on that,
9802 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9803 's bibliography handling,
9804 have a look at section
9805 \begin_inset space ~
9809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9811 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9820 Special Environments
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9825 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9833 \begin_inset Index idx
9838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9848 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9855 \begin_layout Standard
9861 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9863 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9868 key as a fixed whitespace.
9872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9884 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9892 \begin_inset space ~
9896 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9898 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9903 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9922 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9924 If you need to insert blank lines,
9925 you will still need to use
9928 arg "newline-insert newline"
9947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9949 when you finish using the
9955 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9962 environment inside of others.
9965 \begin_layout Standard
9966 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 arg "newline-insert newline"
9976 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9981 \begin_inset space \space{}
9991 arg "newline-insert newline"
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 arg "newline-insert newline"
10011 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10018 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10019 You must put at least one
10023 in any line you want blank.
10029 \begin_layout Itemize
10030 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10034 since that will insert
10039 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10042 arg "self-insert \""
10048 \begin_layout Standard
10049 Here is an example:
10052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10068 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10069 printf("Hello World!
10074 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10078 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10082 \begin_layout Standard
10083 This is just the standard
10084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10094 \begin_layout Standard
10102 such as program source,
10103 shell scripts and so on.
10104 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10105 \begin_inset Index idx
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Paragraph environments
10116 For longer parts of programming code,
10117 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10119 Program Code Listings
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10136 \begin_inset Index idx
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10155 environment is similar to the
10160 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10165 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10179 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10180 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10182 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10185 space) and you can have empty lines.
10199 \begin_layout Itemize
10200 have a certain language and a text style
10203 \begin_layout Itemize
10204 contain hyperlinks,
10206 foot- and margin notes,
10210 index- and nomenclature entries,
10215 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10219 \begin_layout Standard
10220 Because of these properties
10224 works like a typewriter.
10225 Here is an example:
10228 \begin_layout Verbatim
10232 \begin_layout Verbatim
10235 The following 2 lines are empty:
10238 \begin_layout Verbatim
10242 \begin_layout Verbatim
10246 \begin_layout Verbatim
10247 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10252 \begin_layout Standard
10257 environment is identical to
10261 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10262 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10269 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10273 \begin_layout Section
10274 Nesting Environments
10275 \begin_inset Index idx
10280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10306 \begin_layout Subsection
10310 \begin_layout Standard
10312 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10313 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10314 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10315 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10317 you have a list inside of another list,
10318 with the inner list
10319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10338 \begin_layout Enumerate
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10347 \begin_layout Enumerate
10351 \begin_layout Standard
10352 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10353 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10358 \begin_inset space ~
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_inset space ~
10379 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10380 Instead of the menu,
10381 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10384 arg "depth-increment"
10390 arg "depth-decrement"
10393 or the key bindings
10404 arg "depth-increment"
10410 arg "depth-decrement"
10414 The change will work on the current selection,
10415 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10416 or the current paragraph.
10419 \begin_layout Standard
10420 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10421 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10422 If it is invalid to do so,
10423 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10425 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10426 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10431 In \SpecialChar LyX
10433 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10434 as you're about to find out.
10435 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10438 \begin_layout Subsection
10439 What You Can and Can't Nest
10442 \begin_layout Standard
10443 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10444 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10447 \begin_layout Standard
10448 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10449 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10452 \begin_layout Itemize
10453 Completely unnestable
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10458 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10461 \begin_layout Itemize
10463 you can nest them into other environments,
10464 but you can't nest anything into them.
10467 \begin_layout Standard
10468 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10469 and which paragraph environments have them:
10472 \begin_layout Description
10473 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10474 Can't nest into them.
10478 \begin_layout Itemize
10484 \begin_layout Itemize
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Itemize
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Description
10511 \begin_inset space ~
10514 Nestable You can nest them.
10515 You can nest other things into them.
10519 \begin_layout Itemize
10525 \begin_layout Itemize
10531 \begin_layout Itemize
10537 \begin_layout Itemize
10543 \begin_layout Itemize
10549 \begin_layout Itemize
10555 \begin_layout Itemize
10561 \begin_layout Itemize
10568 \begin_layout Itemize
10574 \begin_layout Itemize
10581 \begin_layout Description
10582 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10583 You can't nest anything into them.
10587 \begin_layout Itemize
10593 \begin_layout Itemize
10599 \begin_layout Itemize
10605 \begin_layout Itemize
10611 \begin_layout Itemize
10617 \begin_layout Itemize
10623 \begin_layout Itemize
10629 \begin_layout Itemize
10635 \begin_layout Itemize
10641 \begin_layout Itemize
10647 \begin_layout Itemize
10653 \begin_layout Itemize
10659 \begin_layout Itemize
10665 \begin_layout Itemize
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10675 \begin_layout Itemize
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10692 Although it is possible,
10694 to nest numbered section headings like
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10717 \begin_layout Subsection
10718 Nesting Other Things:
10723 \begin_inset Index idx
10728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10749 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10753 \begin_layout Itemize
10757 \begin_layout Itemize
10761 \begin_layout Itemize
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10767 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10776 Figures and tables in
10780 are not affected by this.
10785 Have a look at section
10786 \begin_inset space ~
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10792 reference "sec:Floats"
10797 for more information about
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10809 or an equation is inline,
10810 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10813 \begin_layout Standard
10815 if you have an equation,
10816 figure or table in a
10817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10825 it behaves just like a
10826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10833 paragraph environment.
10834 You can nest it into any environment,
10835 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 Here's an example with a table:
10842 \begin_layout Enumerate
10847 \begin_layout Enumerate
10848 This is (a) and it's nested.
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10861 \begin_inset Tabular
10862 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10863 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10949 \begin_layout Standard
10950 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10957 \begin_layout Enumerate
10959 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10963 \begin_layout Enumerate
10967 \begin_layout Standard
10968 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10969 the list would look like this:
10972 \begin_layout Enumerate
10977 \begin_layout Enumerate
10978 This is (a) and it's nested.
10982 \begin_layout Standard
10983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10989 \begin_layout Standard
10991 \begin_inset Tabular
10992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11086 \begin_layout Enumerate
11094 it's not nested at all.
11097 \begin_layout Enumerate
11101 \begin_layout Standard
11102 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11103 but is also the first item of a new list!
11106 \begin_layout Standard
11107 There's another trap you can fall into:
11109 but not going deep enough.
11111 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11114 \begin_layout Enumerate
11119 \begin_layout Enumerate
11120 This is (a) and it's nested.
11123 \begin_layout Standard
11124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11130 \begin_layout Standard
11132 \begin_inset Tabular
11133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11221 \begin_layout Standard
11222 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11228 \begin_layout Enumerate
11230 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11238 \begin_layout Enumerate
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11244 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11250 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11252 if you nest tables,
11253 figures or equations,
11254 make sure you go to the right depth!
11257 \begin_layout Subsection
11258 Usage and General Features
11261 \begin_layout Standard
11262 Speaking of levels,
11264 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11274 is the innermost possible depth.
11275 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11278 \begin_layout Enumerate
11279 level #1 – outermost
11283 \begin_layout Enumerate
11288 \begin_layout Enumerate
11293 \begin_layout Enumerate
11298 \begin_layout Itemize
11303 \begin_layout Itemize
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11313 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11314 and you can see both of them in the example.
11315 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11316 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11326 if we tried to nest another
11331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11339 we would get errors.
11342 \begin_layout Subsection
11344 \begin_inset Index idx
11349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11351 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11369 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11370 We have several examples of nested environments.
11372 we explain how we created the example,
11373 so that you can reproduce them.
11376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11378 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11381 \begin_layout Labeling
11382 \labelwidthstring MMM
11383 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11392 \begin_layout Labeling
11393 \labelwidthstring MMM
11394 #2-a This is level #2.
11395 We created it by using
11398 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11404 arg "depth-increment"
11411 \begin_layout Labeling
11412 \labelwidthstring MMM
11413 #3-a This is level #3.
11423 arg "depth-increment"
11427 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11431 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11437 arg "depth-increment"
11444 \begin_layout Standard
11451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11461 We did this by entering
11464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11471 arg "depth-increment"
11475 then changing the paragraph environment to
11480 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11481 it also works for the
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11514 \begin_layout Labeling
11515 \labelwidthstring MMM
11516 #4-a This is level #4.
11520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11523 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11529 we can't nest anything inside a
11534 which is why we're still at level #4.
11540 keep nesting things inside
11541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11552 \begin_layout Labeling
11553 \labelwidthstring MMM
11554 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11559 \begin_layout Labeling
11560 \labelwidthstring MMM
11561 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11562 and this is level #6.
11564 you should know how we made these two.
11568 \begin_layout Labeling
11569 \labelwidthstring MMM
11570 #5-b Back to level #5.
11574 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11580 arg "depth-decrement"
11587 \begin_layout Labeling
11588 \labelwidthstring MMM
11592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11598 arg "depth-decrement"
11602 we're back at level #4.
11606 \begin_layout Labeling
11607 \labelwidthstring MMM
11608 #3-b Back to level #3.
11609 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11613 \begin_layout Labeling
11614 \labelwidthstring MMM
11615 #2-b Back to level #2.
11619 \begin_layout Labeling
11620 \labelwidthstring MMM
11622 back to the outermost level,
11624 After this sentence,
11629 and change the paragraph environment back to
11636 \begin_layout Standard
11637 We could have also used the
11656 environment in place of the
11661 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11669 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11670 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11675 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11685 arg "depth-increment"
11690 \begin_inset Newline newline
11694 we will change to the
11702 \begin_layout Enumerate
11711 \begin_layout Enumerate
11712 Notice how the nested
11716 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11721 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11726 We ended this example by entering
11732 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11736 and reset the nesting depth by using
11739 arg "depth-decrement"
11745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11758 \begin_inset Argument 1
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 Levels and other list environments
11772 \begin_layout Enumerate
11778 paragraph environment.
11779 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11783 \begin_layout Enumerate
11788 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11794 arg "depth-increment"
11799 what happens if we nest an
11803 environment inside of this one?
11804 It will be at level #3,
11805 but what will its label be?
11810 \begin_layout Itemize
11822 even though it's at level #3.
11824 its label is a bullet.
11825 (We got here by using
11828 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11835 arg "depth-increment"
11839 then changing the environment to
11847 \begin_layout Itemize
11852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11859 arg "depth-increment"
11863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11868 \begin_layout Enumerate
11870 to get to level #5.
11873 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11878 Notice the type of numbering,
11884 because we are in the
11892 environment (that is,
11908 \begin_layout Enumerate
11913 change the paragraph environment,
11914 but decrease the nesting depth?
11915 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11919 \begin_layout Enumerate
11921 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11928 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11931 \begin_layout Enumerate
11935 arg "depth-decrement"
11938 to decrease the depth after the next
11941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11948 \begin_layout Enumerate
11950 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11955 \begin_layout Enumerate
11957 Even though we've changed levels,
11959 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11962 \begin_layout Enumerate
11964 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11976 that \SpecialChar LyX
11981 reset the counter for the label.
11985 \begin_layout Enumerate
11989 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11995 arg "depth-decrement"
11999 and we're back to level #2.
12001 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12002 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12010 \begin_layout Enumerate
12011 The same thing happens if we do another
12014 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12020 arg "depth-decrement"
12023 sequence and return to level #1,
12024 the outermost level.
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12029 we reset the environment to
12035 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12045 The number of other
12049 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12055 The same rule applies for the
12063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12068 \begin_layout Enumerate
12069 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12070 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12071 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12090 arg "depth-increment"
12099 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12101 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12102 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12103 Either before or after this,
12104 we will put in the level.
12108 \begin_layout Enumerate
12115 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12119 \begin_layout Verse
12120 Now we will add verse.
12121 \begin_inset Newline newline
12124 It will get much worse.
12125 \begin_inset Newline newline
12136 arg "depth-increment"
12148 \begin_layout Verse
12151 \begin_inset Newline newline
12154 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12155 \begin_inset Newline newline
12161 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12169 \begin_layout Verse
12170 Here comes a table:
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12183 \begin_inset Tabular
12184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12272 \begin_layout Verse
12276 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12288 arg "depth-increment"
12295 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12302 \begin_inset Newline newline
12310 arg "depth-decrement"
12317 \begin_layout Enumerate
12324 level #1) This is another item.
12325 Note that selecting a
12329 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12330 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12337 \begin_layout Quotation
12338 We're now ending the
12342 list and changing to
12347 We're still at level #1.
12348 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12349 The next set of paragraphs is a
12350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12357 We will nest both the
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12369 environments inside of this one,
12370 then use another nested
12374 for the letter body.
12378 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12381 to preserve the depth.
12382 Remember that you need to use
12385 arg "newline-insert newline"
12388 to create multiple lines inside the
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12405 \begin_layout Right Address
12407 \begin_inset Newline newline
12412 \begin_inset Newline newline
12418 \begin_layout Address
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12426 \begin_layout Quotation
12427 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12431 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12433 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12434 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12435 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12437 we thank you for your patience.
12440 \begin_layout Quotation
12443 now have a special on beef.
12444 If you are interested,
12445 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12446 along with payment.
12449 \begin_layout Quotation
12450 We thank you again for your patience.
12453 \begin_layout Address
12455 \begin_inset Newline newline
12462 \begin_layout Quotation
12463 That ends that example!
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12468 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12469 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12470 We could have easily nested an
12492 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12495 \begin_layout Subsection
12497 \begin_inset Index idx
12502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12521 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12528 \begin_layout Standard
12529 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12530 For example you need two different enumerations:
12533 \begin_layout Enumerate
12538 \begin_layout Enumerate
12543 \begin_layout Enumerate
12547 \begin_layout Standard
12548 \begin_inset Separator plain
12554 \begin_layout Itemize
12560 \begin_layout Standard
12561 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12567 \begin_layout Enumerate
12571 \begin_layout Enumerate
12575 \begin_layout Enumerate
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 To split an existing list into two lists,
12581 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12584 Separated <Name> Above
12588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12589 Separated <Name> Below
12592 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12593 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12594 Inside nested environments,
12595 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12600 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12605 you get an environment separator when you press
12608 arg "paragraph-break"
12615 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12618 \begin_layout Section
12620 Pagination and Line Breaks
12621 \begin_inset Index idx
12626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12635 \begin_layout Standard
12637 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12639 offers you more spaces:
12640 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12641 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12644 \begin_layout Subsection
12646 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12648 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12654 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12659 \begin_inset Index idx
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12666 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12671 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12673 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12693 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12697 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12698 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12700 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12703 break the line at that point.
12704 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12708 \begin_layout Quote
12709 Further documentation is given in section
12710 \begin_inset Newline newline
12714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12716 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12724 \begin_layout Standard
12726 it would be a good thing to put a
12727 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12729 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12747 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12758 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12760 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12770 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12782 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12788 \begin_layout Subsection
12790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12792 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12797 \begin_inset Index idx
12802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12825 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 The length units are listed in Appendix
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12836 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12846 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12848 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12852 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12856 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12861 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12865 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12872 \begin_inset Index idx
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12884 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12886 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12902 \begin_layout Standard
12903 With the introduction of typewriters,
12904 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12905 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12906 automatically takes care about this.
12908 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12916 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12922 To insert a normal space,
12925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12928 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12930 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12942 arg "space-insert normal"
12948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12950 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12956 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12961 \begin_inset Index idx
12966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12991 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12998 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13003 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13005 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13013 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13015 inside abbreviations:
13018 \begin_layout Quote
13020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13024 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13027 \begin_layout Standard
13028 or between values and units.
13029 Compare for example this:
13030 \begin_inset Newline newline
13034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13038 \begin_inset Newline newline
13041 10 kg (normal space
13042 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13048 \begin_layout Standard
13049 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13052 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13054 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13056 \begin_inset space ~
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13070 arg "space-insert thin"
13076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13080 \begin_layout Standard
13081 You can also insert the following space types:
13084 \begin_layout Description
13086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13094 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13098 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13102 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13106 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13111 space between the arrows.
13112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13116 \begin_layout Description
13118 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13120 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13127 space A line with a
13128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13132 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13140 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13142 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13145 space between the arrows.
13148 \begin_layout Description
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13157 space A line with a
13158 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13162 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13169 negative thin space between the arrows.
13172 \begin_layout Description
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13181 space A line with a
13182 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13186 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13190 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13193 negative medium space between the arrows.
13196 \begin_layout Description
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13205 space A line with a
13206 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13210 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13217 negative thick space between the arrows.
13220 \begin_layout Description
13222 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13224 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13226 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13240 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13244 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13248 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13252 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13254 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13269 em) space between the arrows.
13272 \begin_layout Description
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13282 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13286 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13290 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13294 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13296 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13307 em) space between the arrows.
13310 \begin_layout Description
13312 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13314 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13330 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13334 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13338 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13342 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13344 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13346 \begin_inset space ~
13350 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13354 \begin_inset space ~
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13361 em) space between the arrows.
13364 \begin_layout Description
13366 \begin_inset space ~
13370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13374 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13379 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13386 cm space between the arrows.
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13397 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13402 lists the different space sizes.
13405 \begin_layout Standard
13406 \begin_inset Float table
13413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13414 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13419 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13423 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13433 \begin_inset Tabular
13434 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13435 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13436 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13437 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13492 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13494 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13495 Non-breaking Normal
13502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13526 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13535 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13537 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13552 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13569 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13580 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13586 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13623 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13629 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13693 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13698 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13700 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13704 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13706 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13723 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13725 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13733 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13735 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13784 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13786 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13826 \begin_inset Index idx
13831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13850 \begin_layout Standard
13851 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13852 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13854 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13857 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13858 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13859 If there is more than one H
13860 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13864 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13867 \begin_layout Standard
13868 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13871 \begin_layout Quote
13873 This is on the left side
13874 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13877 This is on the right
13880 \begin_layout Quote
13883 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13887 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13893 \begin_layout Quote
13896 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13900 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13911 That was an example in the
13917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13921 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13928 is one in a standard paragraph.
13929 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13934 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13937 \begin_layout Standard
13939 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13941 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13944 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13947 \begin_inset space ~
13952 s in the space dialog:
13953 The following patterns are available:
13956 \begin_layout Standard
13959 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13963 \begin_inset space ~
13969 \begin_layout Standard
13972 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13976 \begin_inset space ~
13982 \begin_layout Standard
13985 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13995 \begin_layout Standard
13998 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14002 \begin_inset space ~
14008 \begin_layout Standard
14010 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14012 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14016 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14017 (= opened downwards)
14021 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14025 \begin_inset space ~
14031 \begin_layout Standard
14033 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14039 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14044 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14048 \begin_inset space ~
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14065 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14067 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14070 is at the beginning of a line,
14075 in the first line in a paragraph,
14079 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14081 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14084 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14085 If you need space in this case anyway,
14087 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14091 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14096 option in the space dialog.
14104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14108 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14113 \begin_inset Index idx
14118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14137 \begin_layout Standard
14138 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14140 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14143 \begin_layout Standard
14144 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14147 What is correct English?:
14148 \begin_inset Newline newline
14152 \begin_inset Newline newline
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14159 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14160 \begin_inset Newline newline
14164 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14175 \begin_inset Newline newline
14179 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14190 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14196 \begin_layout Standard
14198 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14203 \begin_inset space ~
14207 \begin_inset space ~
14211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14216 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14219 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14223 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14239 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14249 That is why it is named
14250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14258 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14259 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14262 \begin_layout Subsection
14264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14266 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14271 \begin_inset Index idx
14276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14295 \begin_layout Standard
14296 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14300 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14308 There you find the following sizes:
14311 \begin_layout Standard
14315 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14324 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14332 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14337 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14338 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14342 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14347 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14352 \begin_inset space ~
14358 \begin_inset Index idx
14363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14379 for the paragraph separation.
14380 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14383 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14391 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14397 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14401 \begin_layout Standard
14403 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14412 equal to the height,
14413 or half the height,
14414 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14419 \begin_layout Standard
14423 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14429 \begin_inset Index idx
14434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14436 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14450 is a variable space,
14451 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14453 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14458 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14459 because the space between them is then maximal.
14463 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14471 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14477 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14490 s are described in section
14491 \begin_inset space ~
14495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14497 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14507 If there are several
14510 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14516 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14517 You can therefore use
14520 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14525 s to center text on a page,
14526 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14529 \begin_layout Standard
14534 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14535 \begin_inset space ~
14539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14541 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14549 \begin_layout Standard
14550 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14561 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14562 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14574 \begin_layout Subsection
14575 Paragraph Alignment
14576 \begin_inset Index idx
14581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14600 \begin_layout Standard
14601 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14606 dialog (toolbar button
14609 arg "layout-paragraph"
14613 There are five possibilities:
14616 \begin_layout Itemize
14624 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14630 \begin_layout Itemize
14638 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14644 \begin_layout Itemize
14652 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14658 \begin_layout Itemize
14666 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14672 \begin_layout Itemize
14680 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14686 \begin_layout Standard
14687 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14688 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14689 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14690 and look like this:
14693 \begin_layout Standard
14695 This paragraph is right aligned,
14698 \begin_layout Standard
14700 this one is centered,
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14705 this one is left aligned.
14708 \begin_layout Subsection
14710 \begin_inset Index idx
14715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14717 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14734 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14741 \begin_layout Standard
14742 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14743 does the page breaks in your document,
14744 you can force a page break where you want one.
14745 Normally this will not be necessary,
14746 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14747 is good at page breaking.
14748 Only if you use a lot of
14754 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14757 \begin_layout Standard
14758 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14762 have to change the page breaking.
14765 \begin_layout Standard
14766 There are two types of page breaks:
14767 One that ends the page without any special action.
14768 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 that is inserted via the menu
14782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14783 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14791 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14792 so that it fills out the complete page.
14793 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14797 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14800 the wrong way to do it.
14802 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14803 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14807 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14812 to learn more about
14819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14823 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14828 \begin_inset Index idx
14833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14854 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14855 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14856 including unprocessed floats,
14857 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14858 if necessary by adding pages.
14861 \begin_layout Standard
14862 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14865 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14873 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14874 you can use the menu
14876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14879 \begin_inset space ~
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14888 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14889 if necessary by adding a page.
14890 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14896 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14897 Suppressing Page Breaks
14900 \begin_inset Index idx
14905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14907 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14926 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14930 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14935 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14939 \begin_layout Standard
14941 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14942 To discourage page break at
14943 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14945 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14946 certain point you can use
14950 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14952 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14955 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14957 \change_deleted 5381 1686690158
14959 \change_inserted 5381 1686690161
14961 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14968 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14969 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14974 \begin_layout Subsection
14976 \begin_inset Index idx
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14990 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14998 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14999 one simply breaks the line.
15000 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
15002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15003 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15009 \begin_inset space ~
15017 arg "newline-insert newline"
15021 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15024 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15030 \begin_inset space ~
15038 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15041 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15042 This is useful to avoid
15043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15050 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15053 \begin_layout Standard
15054 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15056 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15057 is very good at line breaking.
15060 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15062 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15063 \begin_inset space ~
15067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15069 reference "sec:Quote"
15076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15078 reference "sec:Verse"
15084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15086 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15094 \begin_layout Subsection
15096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15098 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15103 \begin_inset Index idx
15108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_layout Standard
15119 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15130 \begin_layout Standard
15134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15135 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15137 \begin_inset space ~
15142 you can insert horizontal lines.
15143 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15144 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15147 \begin_layout Standard
15149 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15160 \begin_layout Section
15161 Characters and Symbols
15164 \begin_layout Standard
15165 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15166 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15168 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15176 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15181 for information on how this is done.
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15185 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15190 dialog via the menu
15192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15193 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15199 \begin_layout Standard
15200 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15209 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15211 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15219 \begin_layout Section
15220 Fonts and Text Styles
15221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15223 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15230 \begin_layout Subsection
15232 \begin_inset Index idx
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15239 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_layout Standard
15257 There are two types of fonts:
15260 \begin_layout Description
15262 \begin_inset space ~
15266 \begin_inset Index idx
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15273 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15287 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15292 characters) in the font.
15293 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15294 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15295 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15296 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15297 \begin_inset Newline newline
15300 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15301 But to achieve a better quality,
15302 many fonts define several font sizes.
15303 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15304 \begin_inset Newline newline
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15328 \begin_layout Description
15330 \begin_inset space ~
15334 \begin_inset Index idx
15339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15356 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15357 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15359 they don't scale well,
15360 because in order to scale a glyph,
15361 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15362 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15363 In order to mitigate this effect,
15364 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15368 pixels high up to 34
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15372 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15373 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15374 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15375 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15377 \begin_inset Newline newline
15380 Bitmap fonts are named
15383 \begin_inset space ~
15388 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15393 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15394 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15395 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15398 \begin_layout Standard
15399 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15400 look at its document properties.
15403 \begin_layout Standard
15404 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15405 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15407 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15410 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15412 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15413 to emphasize text you use an
15414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15422 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15424 In \SpecialChar LyX
15426 you do things based on contexts,
15427 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15430 \begin_layout Subsection
15433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15435 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15442 \begin_layout Standard
15445 used its own fonts.
15447 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15448 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15450 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15451 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15452 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15453 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15454 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15455 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15456 files are very portable across different machines.
15458 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15459 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15460 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15462 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15463 \begin_inset space ~
15467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15469 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15475 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15476 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15479 \begin_layout Standard
15480 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15481 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15482 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15483 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15485 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15488 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15489 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15503 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15505 or other font deficiencies;
15506 so you might have to experiment.
15514 \begin_layout Subsection
15515 Document Font and Font size
15516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15518 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15523 \begin_inset Index idx
15528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15530 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15545 \begin_inset Index idx
15550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15552 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15569 \begin_layout Standard
15570 You can set the document fonts in the
15572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15576 \begin_inset Index idx
15581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 section of the dialog,
15603 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15608 \begin_inset space ~
15618 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15619 \begin_inset space ~
15622 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15625 \begin_layout Standard
15631 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15632 This requires that you use
15645 as the output format,
15647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15651 \begin_inset space \space{}
15654 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15655 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15656 installed (see section
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15663 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15669 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15671 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15672 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15674 \begin_inset space ~
15679 since \SpecialChar LyX
15680 cannot determine the family.
15681 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15682 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15685 cannot determine this in advance,
15686 so you might need to experiment.
15689 \begin_layout Standard
15690 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15691 fonts (which is the default),
15692 the possible options for the font include
15696 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15703 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15705 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15707 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15712 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15714 depending on the document language,
15718 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15719 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15727 \begin_inset space ~
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15743 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15744 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15752 \begin_inset space ~
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15766 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15788 European Computer Modern
15791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15800 some classes set different default fonts.
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15809 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15810 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15815 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15818 \begin_inset space ~
15823 version 6 or later,
15824 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15829 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15830 you have to use a vector font.
15831 Depending on how your document should look,
15835 \begin_layout Itemize
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15845 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15857 \begin_inset space ~
15862 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15863 community in order to replace
15867 as the default font.
15868 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15869 Except for some details,
15870 where the appearance was improved,
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15888 One difference is improved kerning.
15896 \begin_layout Itemize
15897 If you do not like the look of
15906 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15928 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15932 serif and typewriter fonts,
15936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15937 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 for sans serif text),
15955 or different shapes of the same font,
15957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15961 \begin_inset space \space{}
15969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15973 \begin_inset space \space{}
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15987 \begin_inset space ~
15997 but you can also select your own.
15998 \begin_inset Newline newline
16001 The differences between roman,
16005 \begin_inset space ~
16014 fonts are explained in section
16015 \begin_inset space ~
16019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16021 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16027 \begin_inset Newline newline
16033 \begin_inset space ~
16038 was originally designed for newspapers.
16039 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16043 \begin_inset space ~
16048 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16051 \begin_layout Standard
16052 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16068 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16073 depends on the class you are using.
16074 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 Note that the font size is the
16083 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16084 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16086 and subscripts) by this value.
16087 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16090 \begin_inset space ~
16096 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16097 \begin_inset space ~
16101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16103 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16111 \begin_layout Standard
16115 \begin_inset space ~
16120 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16122 \begin_inset space ~
16125 serif or typewriter.
16130 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16131 the other selections override this.
16142 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16145 \begin_layout Standard
16150 LaTeX font encoding
16152 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16158 \begin_inset Index idx
16163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16166 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16183 \begin_inset space ~
16187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16189 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16198 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16199 Unless you have specific reasons,
16201 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16205 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16213 \begin_layout Standard
16217 Use Old Style Figures
16221 Use True Small Caps
16224 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16227 Use Old Style Figures
16230 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16231 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16239 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16240 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16243 Use True Small Caps
16245 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16246 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16247 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16248 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16252 \begin_layout Standard
16254 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16257 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16262 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16268 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16274 \begin_layout Standard
16279 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16281 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16292 \begin_inset Index idx
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16314 So this has no effect for the document language
16330 \begin_layout Standard
16333 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16335 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16341 \begin_inset Index idx
16346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16349 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16367 \begin_layout Standard
16370 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16372 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16377 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16379 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16385 instead of ligatures (--,
16387 \begin_inset space ~
16391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16393 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16404 \begin_layout Standard
16405 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16409 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16418 When you choose a new font or font size,
16424 change the screen font!
16425 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16426 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16428 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16435 \begin_inset space ~
16439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16441 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16454 \begin_layout Subsection
16458 \begin_layout Standard
16459 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16460 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16461 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16462 fonts for your document,
16463 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16469 \begin_inset Index idx
16474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16476 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16491 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16492 automatically selects a math font.
16493 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16494 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16495 's default font family
16496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16502 \begin_inset space ~
16508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16513 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16516 \begin_layout Standard
16517 Note that the math font will not be used for
16521 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16527 or by the insertion of the command
16534 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16535 \begin_inset space ~
16539 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16541 \begin_inset space ~
16544 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16547 \begin_inset space ~
16555 \begin_inset space ~
16560 in the document font settings.
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16565 fonts for the document,
16566 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16567 font (in most cases
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16583 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16584 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16591 \begin_inset space ~
16597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16603 \begin_layout Subsection
16605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16615 name "subsec:charstyles"
16622 \begin_inset Index idx
16627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16634 \begin_inset Index idx
16639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16648 \begin_layout Standard
16649 As we've already seen,
16651 automatically changes the
16652 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16655 style for certain paragraph environments.
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16659 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16660 This is where we meet the concept of
16666 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16668 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16680 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16682 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16696 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16707 available with all document classes.
16709 some document classes and modules provide
16713 for specific purposes.
16714 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16717 \begin_layout Standard
16719 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16722 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16731 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16736 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16737 you selected it and chose e.
16738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16759 encourage the use of
16771 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16773 \begin_inset space ~
16777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16779 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16785 Rather than fiddling with
16790 they encourage the use of
16795 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16801 \begin_inset Quotes els
16805 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16810 \begin_inset Quotes els
16814 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16818 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16820 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16821 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16822 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16823 On a more practical level,
16824 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16825 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16830 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16837 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16838 With a semantic markup (such as
16844 you'd just need to change the definition of
16849 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16852 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16853 using different markup semantics.
16856 \begin_layout Standard
16858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16860 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16869 Builtin Text Styles
16870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16872 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16881 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16882 The two builtin text styles can be
16883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16887 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16891 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16892 both of these styles
16895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16899 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16901 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16910 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16924 do one of the following:
16927 \begin_layout Itemize
16928 click on the toolbar button
16937 \begin_layout Itemize
16938 use the key binding
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16949 \begin_layout Itemize
16951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16955 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16957 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16959 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16967 arg "dialog-show character"
16971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16975 arg "dialog-show character"
16979 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16980 as described in section
16981 \begin_inset space ~
16985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16987 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16993 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17005 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17007 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17011 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17015 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17017 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17021 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17030 style is already active,
17031 they deactivate it.
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17035 One typically uses the
17039 style for proper names.
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17049 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17055 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17059 \begin_layout Standard
17061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17067 is producing text in
17072 but the definition can be changed.
17077 \begin_layout Standard
17079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17089 You can activate (or deactivate —
17090 it's also a toggle) the
17097 \begin_layout Itemize
17098 clicking on the toolbar button
17107 \begin_layout Itemize
17108 using the keybindings
17115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17119 \begin_layout Itemize
17121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17125 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17127 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17137 arg "dialog-show character"
17141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17145 arg "dialog-show character"
17149 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17150 as described in section
17151 \begin_inset space ~
17155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17157 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17163 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17173 \begin_layout Standard
17178 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17180 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17182 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17185 packages use a different font
17186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17188 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17194 \begin_layout Standard
17195 We've been using the
17199 style all over the place in this document.
17200 Here's one more example:
17203 \begin_layout Quotation
17207 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17209 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17216 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17217 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17218 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17219 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17220 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17227 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17233 \begin_layout Standard
17235 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17236 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17237 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17245 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17248 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17255 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17257 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17269 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17281 arg "dialog-show character"
17287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17289 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17295 arg "dialog-show character"
17299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17309 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17316 \begin_layout Standard
17318 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17319 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17320 a module (see section
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17327 reference "subsec:Modules"
17336 or local layout settings (see section
17337 \begin_inset space ~
17341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17343 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17349 As the two builtin styles,
17354 markup for specific functions.
17361 module that provides,
17362 among other things,
17363 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17375 \begin_inset Quotes els
17379 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17385 \begin_layout Standard
17387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17388 These styles can be found,
17392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17394 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17405 For the purpose of demonstration,
17406 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17410 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17411 By example of the emphasized style,
17412 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17417 appears as normal font change,
17418 the custom text style
17419 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17424 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17432 appears as an inset,
17433 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17434 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17436 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17438 \begin_inset Flex Code
17441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17453 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17468 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17473 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17482 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17487 \begin_layout Subsection
17489 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17501 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17517 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17522 \begin_inset Index idx
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17536 \begin_layout Standard
17537 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17542 so \SpecialChar LyX
17544 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17546 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17551 the properties of text passages
17552 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17557 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17559 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17564 \begin_layout Standard
17566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17567 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17569 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17570 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17575 comes in as a last resort.
17580 \begin_layout Standard
17581 Before we document how to
17582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17583 use custom character style
17584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17585 tweak the text properties
17588 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17597 \begin_inset Newline newline
17600 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17603 \begin_layout Standard
17605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17606 use custom character styles
17607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17608 tweak text properties
17612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17617 \begin_inset space ~
17620 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17628 arg "dialog-show character"
17631 dialog or press the toolbar button
17634 arg "dialog-show character"
17639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17642 boxes in this dialog,
17643 each corresponding to a different
17644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17649 property that you can choose.
17650 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17660 which keeps the current state of that property.
17662 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17668 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17673 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17674 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17677 \begin_layout Standard
17679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17681 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17685 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17687 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17691 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17693 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17699 and their options (in addition to
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17708 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17720 \begin_layout Labeling
17721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 The possible options are:
17739 \begin_layout Labeling
17740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17745 This is the Roman font family.
17746 Normally a serif font.
17747 It's also the default family.
17757 \begin_layout Labeling
17758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17769 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17781 \begin_layout Labeling
17782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17789 This is the Typewriter font family.
17795 arg "font-typewriter"
17801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17805 \begin_layout Standard
17807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17808 The general differences of these families are:
17811 \begin_layout Itemize
17813 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17818 fonts use characters with serifs.
17819 These are the small
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17827 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17828 The following example shows the difference:
17829 \begin_inset Newline newline
17833 \begin_inset Newline newline
17838 text without serifs
17841 \begin_inset Newline newline
17844 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17845 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17852 \begin_layout Itemize
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17859 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17860 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17861 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17864 \begin_layout Itemize
17866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17880 which means every character has the same width;
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17899 \begin_inset Newline newline
17903 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17921 \begin_inset Note Note
17924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17927 For more on phantoms see section
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17934 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17945 \begin_inset Newline newline
17954 \begin_layout Labeling
17955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17960 This corresponds to the print weight.
17965 \begin_layout Labeling
17966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17971 This is the Medium font series.
17972 It's also the default series.
17975 \begin_layout Labeling
17976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17983 This is the Bold font series.
17996 \begin_layout Labeling
17997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18002 As the name implies.
18007 \begin_layout Labeling
18008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18013 This is the Upright font shape.
18014 It's also the default shape.
18017 \begin_layout Labeling
18018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18028 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18038 s the Italic font shape
18044 \begin_layout Labeling
18045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18052 This is the Slanted font shape
18054 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18056 this is different from italic).
18059 \begin_layout Labeling
18060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18071 This is the Small caps font shape
18078 \begin_layout Labeling
18079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18081 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18086 Alters the text color.
18087 Note that not all DVI
18088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18090 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18091 viewers are able to display colors.
18095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18105 which means that the document default color set in
18107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18114 \begin_inset space ~
18121 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18123 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18125 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18127 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18222 \begin_inset Index idx
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18229 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18250 \begin_layout Labeling
18251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18253 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18258 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18259 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18260 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18262 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18264 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18266 \begin_inset Newline newline
18269 If you have for example,
18270 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18272 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18273 When using the spell checking (see section
18274 \begin_inset space ~
18278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18280 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18285 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18286 \begin_inset Newline newline
18289 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18292 Exclude from Spellchecking
18295 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18300 \begin_layout Labeling
18301 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18306 Alters the size of the font.
18308 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18314 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18317 numerical values here;
18318 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18320 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18322 but a general description of what you want to do.
18327 \begin_layout Labeling
18328 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 arg "font-size tiny"
18355 \begin_layout Labeling
18356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18377 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18383 \begin_layout Labeling
18384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18405 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18411 \begin_layout Labeling
18412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18433 arg "font-size small"
18439 \begin_layout Labeling
18440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18454 It's also the default size.
18458 arg "font-size normal"
18464 \begin_layout Labeling
18465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 arg "font-size large"
18492 \begin_layout Labeling
18493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18514 arg "font-size larger"
18520 \begin_layout Labeling
18521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18542 arg "font-size largest"
18548 \begin_layout Labeling
18549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18570 arg "font-size huge"
18576 \begin_layout Labeling
18577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18598 arg "font-size giant"
18604 \begin_layout Labeling
18605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18610 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18631 arg "font-size increase"
18637 \begin_layout Labeling
18638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18643 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18664 arg "font-size decrease"
18670 \begin_layout Standard
18676 don't go crazy with this feature.
18677 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18679 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18681 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18682 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18687 \begin_layout Standard
18689 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18690 Another combo box allows to tweak
18697 \begin_layout Labeling
18698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18700 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18705 Alters the text color.
18706 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18712 which means that the document default color set in
18714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18715 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18821 \begin_inset Index idx
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18832 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18837 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18855 \begin_layout Labeling
18856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18858 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18868 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18869 change a few other things at the character level
18870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18871 have text passages being underlined
18875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18876 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18877 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18878 when you could not change fonts.
18879 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18880 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18881 because some people
18885 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18892 \begin_layout Labeling
18893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18902 This is text with emphasize on
18905 This might seem like the same as
18910 but it is actually a bit different.
18916 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18917 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18922 \begin_layout Labeling
18923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18930 Don't use underlining.
18935 \begin_layout Labeling
18936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18938 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18950 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18952 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18961 arg "font-underline"
18967 \begin_inset Newline newline
18971 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18974 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18975 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18976 when you could not change fonts.
18977 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18978 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18979 because some people
18983 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18988 \begin_layout Labeling
18989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18993 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18995 \begin_inset space ~
19004 This is text with Double under
19005 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19016 arg "font-underunderline"
19020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19022 \begin_inset Newline newline
19025 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19026 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19031 \begin_layout Labeling
19032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19036 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19038 \begin_inset space ~
19047 This is text with Wavy under
19048 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19059 arg "font-underwave"
19063 \begin_inset Newline newline
19066 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19067 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19073 \begin_layout Labeling
19074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19081 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19087 \begin_layout Labeling
19088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19095 Don't use strikethrough.
19098 \begin_layout Labeling
19099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19103 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19105 \begin_inset space ~
19109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19120 Single strikethrough
19128 arg "font-strikeout"
19132 \begin_inset Newline newline
19135 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19138 \begin_layout Labeling
19139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19145 \begin_inset space ~
19149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19151 \begin_inset space ~
19155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19163 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19165 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19171 \begin_inset Newline newline
19174 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19178 \begin_layout Standard
19180 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19181 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19184 \begin_layout Labeling
19185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19187 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19192 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19193 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19194 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19195 \begin_inset Newline newline
19198 If you have for example,
19199 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19201 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19202 When using the spell checking (see section
19203 \begin_inset space ~
19207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19209 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19214 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19215 \begin_inset Newline newline
19218 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19221 Exclude from Spellchecking
19224 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19230 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19231 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19232 \begin_inset space ~
19236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19238 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19244 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19254 \begin_layout Itemize
19256 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19264 This is text with emphasize on
19269 \begin_layout Itemize
19273 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19281 This is text with Noun on.
19283 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19291 this is a logical attribute.
19292 Normally it's equivalent to
19295 \begin_inset space ~
19305 \begin_layout Standard
19306 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19307 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19314 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19315 chosen a new character style
19316 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19317 applied a text property
19320 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19325 \begin_inset space ~
19328 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19336 arg "dialog-show character"
19342 arg "dialog-show character"
19347 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19351 You can activate the
19352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19355 last applied properties
19357 by using the toolbar button
19360 arg "textstyle-apply"
19364 The button lets you apply
19365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19366 your custom character style
19367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19370 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19372 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19373 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19374 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19375 20) most recently applied settings,
19376 from which you can select one.
19381 \begin_layout Standard
19382 To completely reset the
19383 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19386 text properties of a selection
19390 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19392 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19402 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19407 from the menu of the toolbar button
19410 arg "textstyle-apply"
19417 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19418 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19438 \begin_inset space ~
19452 \begin_layout Standard
19454 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19455 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19463 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_layout Itemize
19478 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 which means every character has the same width;
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19511 \begin_inset Newline newline
19515 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_inset Note Note
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 For more on phantoms see section
19534 \begin_inset space ~
19538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19540 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19551 \begin_inset Newline newline
19557 \begin_layout Itemize
19559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19564 fonts use characters with serifs.
19565 These are the small
19566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19573 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19574 The following example shows the difference:
19575 \begin_inset Newline newline
19579 \begin_inset Newline newline
19584 text without serifs
19587 \begin_inset Newline newline
19590 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19591 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19598 \begin_layout Itemize
19600 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19605 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19606 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19607 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19612 \begin_layout Standard
19614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19622 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19623 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19626 \begin_inset space ~
19632 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19635 apply a style with properties A,
19636 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19639 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19640 the text ends up with properties A,
19644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19659 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19660 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19669 toggling behavior is up to you.
19673 \begin_inset space ~
19679 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19713 \begin_inset space ~
19719 then apply the style to bold face text,
19720 the text will revert to the default series (
19721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19729 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19734 \begin_layout Standard
19736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19739 with the same warning once again:
19740 Do not overuse the fonts!
19742 more often than not,
19743 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19746 \begin_layout Section
19747 Printing and Previewing
19750 \begin_layout Subsection
19754 \begin_layout Standard
19755 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19757 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19758 Before we tell you that,
19759 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19760 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19762 Additional Features
19767 \begin_layout Standard
19769 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19772 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19773 typesetting system,
19774 but to prevent confusion,
19775 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19778 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19781 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19782 to turn your writing into printable output.
19783 This happens in two stages:
19786 \begin_layout Enumerate
19789 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19791 generating a file with the extension,
19793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19807 \begin_layout Enumerate
19810 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19811 to use the commands in the
19815 file to produce printable output.
19818 \begin_layout Subsection
19819 Output file formats
19820 \begin_inset Index idx
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19834 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19843 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19845 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19849 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19853 \begin_inset Index idx
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19867 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19883 \begin_layout Standard
19884 This file type has the extension
19885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19897 It contains your document as plain text
19898 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19900 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19901 following the rules of the
19902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19905 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19914 \begin_layout Standard
19915 You can export your document to
19916 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19918 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19923 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19924 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19926 \begin_inset space ~
19933 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19934 bibliography (section
19935 \begin_inset space ~
19939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19941 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19947 If your document includes such material,
19950 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19951 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19953 \begin_inset space ~
19957 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_inset space ~
19969 \begin_inset space ~
19973 \begin_inset space ~
19979 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19980 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19982 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19991 \begin_inset Index idx
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 \begin_layout Standard
20017 This file type has the extension
20018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20029 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20030 program to process your document.
20031 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20033 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20034 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20035 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20036 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20037 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20040 \begin_layout Standard
20041 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20042 -file using the menu
20044 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20045 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20049 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20050 export variants are explained in section
20051 \begin_inset space ~
20055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20057 reference "subsec:Export"
20065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20067 \begin_inset Index idx
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 \begin_layout Standard
20092 This file type has the extension
20093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20114 because it is completely portable;
20115 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20116 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20120 \begin_layout Standard
20121 DVI files do not contain images,
20122 they only link to them.
20123 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20124 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20125 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20126 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20129 \begin_layout Standard
20130 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20132 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20133 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20138 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20139 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20141 \begin_inset space ~
20147 The latter option uses the program
20149 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20155 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20158 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20159 \begin_inset space ~
20163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20165 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20171 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20172 is still a work in progress,
20173 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20179 \begin_inset Index idx
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 \begin_layout Standard
20204 This file type has the extension
20205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20217 PostScript was developed by the company
20221 as a printer language.
20222 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20223 PostScript can be seen as a
20224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20227 programming language
20228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20232 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20238 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20244 \begin_inset Index idx
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 As a result of this,
20272 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20275 \begin_layout Standard
20276 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20280 Encapsulated PostScript
20281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20298 As \SpecialChar LyX
20299 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20300 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20304 \begin_inset space ~
20307 images in your document,
20310 \begin_inset space ~
20313 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20314 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20316 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20317 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20320 \begin_layout Standard
20321 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20323 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20324 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20332 \begin_inset Index idx
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 \begin_inset Index idx
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 \begin_layout Standard
20369 This file type has the extension
20370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20386 Portable Document Format
20387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20394 was derived from PostScript.
20395 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20405 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20408 \begin_layout Standard
20409 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20413 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20446 Portable Network Graphics
20447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20464 You can also use any other image format,
20465 because \SpecialChar LyX
20466 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20467 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20468 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20469 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20472 \begin_layout Standard
20473 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20475 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20481 \begin_layout Description
20483 \begin_inset space ~
20486 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20490 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20493 \begin_layout Description
20495 \begin_inset space ~
20502 ) This uses the program
20504 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20507 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20510 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20519 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20520 \begin_inset space ~
20524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20526 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20533 is still a work in progress,
20534 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20538 \begin_layout Description
20540 \begin_inset space ~
20547 ) This uses the program
20552 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20558 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20559 \begin_inset space ~
20563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20565 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20571 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20573 vertically written Japanese.
20576 \begin_layout Description
20578 \begin_inset space ~
20581 (cropped) This is the same as
20584 \begin_inset space ~
20589 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20590 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20591 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20594 \begin_layout Description
20596 \begin_inset space ~
20599 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20603 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20606 \begin_layout Description
20608 \begin_inset space ~
20611 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20615 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20616 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20620 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20621 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20624 \begin_layout Standard
20628 \begin_inset space ~
20637 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20640 and works without problems.
20641 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20642 or specific OpenType fonts,
20643 you might want to try out
20646 \begin_inset space ~
20654 \begin_inset space ~
20660 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20669 \begin_inset Index idx
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 \begin_inset Index idx
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 \begin_layout Standard
20706 This file type has the extension
20707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20719 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20720 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20721 When \SpecialChar LyX
20723 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20724 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20727 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20730 between different formats,
20731 which are described in section
20733 Math Output in XHTML
20738 \begin_inset space ~
20746 \begin_layout Standard
20747 XHTML output remains
20748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20756 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20757 features are supported yet.
20761 and the World Wide Web
20766 Additional Features
20769 for more information.
20772 \begin_layout Standard
20773 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20776 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20782 \begin_layout Subsection
20784 \begin_inset Index idx
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 \begin_layout Standard
20809 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20810 with all of the page breaks in place,
20811 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20821 or use the toolbar button
20828 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20829 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20830 \begin_inset space ~
20834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20836 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20841 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20848 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20854 Further output formats can be selected via
20856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20857 View (Other Formats)
20859 or the toolbar button
20868 \begin_layout Standard
20869 If you have changed your document,
20870 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20878 Update (Other Formats)
20884 \begin_layout Standard
20885 When you preview a file,
20886 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20887 's temporary directory.
20888 To have a real output,
20889 export your document.
20892 \begin_layout Section
20893 A few Words about Typography
20894 \begin_inset Index idx
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 \begin_layout Subsection
20910 Dashes and Minus Signs
20911 \begin_inset Index idx
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 \begin_inset Index idx
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 \begin_layout Standard
20938 In \SpecialChar LyX
20941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20952 symbol comes in four variants:
20973 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20979 \begin_layout Standard
20980 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20990 height_special "totalheight"
20995 backgroundcolor "none"
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 \begin_inset Tabular
21000 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
21001 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21002 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21004 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21005 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21074 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 system key combination
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 the en dash is entered with
21106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21115 and the em dash with
21118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21131 is the Mac label for the right
21141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21154 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 system key combination or
21179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21245 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21251 \begin_layout Standard
21252 Dashes can also be inserted with
21254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21256 \begin_inset space ~
21259 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21267 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21270 \begin_layout Standard
21271 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21272 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21273 Here are some examples:
21276 \begin_layout Enumerate
21277 line- and page-breaks
21278 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21288 \begin_layout Enumerate
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21305 \begin_layout Enumerate
21306 The em dash is used without spaces:
21309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21319 \begin_layout Enumerate
21320 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21324 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21334 \begin_layout Standard
21336 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21338 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21339 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21347 \begin_layout Subsection
21348 Dashes and Line Breaks
21349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21351 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21358 \begin_layout Standard
21359 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21367 \begin_layout Itemize
21369 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21370 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21373 \begin_layout Itemize
21375 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21378 \begin_layout Itemize
21379 In French and Spanish,
21380 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21381 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21384 \begin_layout Standard
21386 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21387 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21398 allows line breaks after hyphens
21399 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21402 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21405 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21408 \begin_layout Enumerate
21409 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21410 \begin_inset space ~
21413 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21415 The Elements of Typographic Style
21418 \begin_inset space ~
21421 – can be prevented using
21422 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21424 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21430 \begin_layout Enumerate
21431 Unwanted line breaks
21436 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21438 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21441 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 Prevent Hyphenation
21453 \begin_inset space ~
21469 in \SpecialChar TeX
21471 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21474 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21476 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21478 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21479 space does not suffice
21483 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21491 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21492 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21505 \begin_layout Itemize
21507 \begin_inset space ~
21511 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21521 height_special "totalheight"
21526 backgroundcolor "none"
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 \begin_layout Itemize
21540 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21550 height_special "totalheight"
21555 backgroundcolor "none"
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 \begin_inset space ~
21568 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21569 \begin_inset space ~
21572 – sont très utiles.
21575 \begin_layout Itemize
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 un inciso con rayas—
21595 \begin_layout Standard
21596 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21597 \begin_inset space ~
21600 – in contrast to an overfull line
21601 \begin_inset space ~
21604 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21608 \begin_layout Standard
21609 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21610 you can select the option
21612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21613 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21614 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21615 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21620 \begin_layout Enumerate
21621 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21622 They can be prevented using
21623 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21625 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21628 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21634 \begin_layout Itemize
21636 \begin_inset space ~
21639 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21640 \begin_inset space ~
21643 – sont très utiles.
21647 \begin_layout Enumerate
21648 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21649 \begin_inset Newline newline
21654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21655 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21657 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21659 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21661 \begin_inset space ~
21667 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21669 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21671 \begin_inset space ~
21682 \begin_layout Itemize
21683 Em-dashes without spaces—
21684 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21685 common in American English—
21686 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21687 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21690 \begin_layout Standard
21691 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21692 \begin_inset space ~
21696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21698 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21710 \begin_layout Enumerate
21713 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21714 \begin_inset space ~
21718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21720 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21732 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21735 \begin_layout Standard
21736 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21738 \begin_inset space ~
21742 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21751 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21759 \begin_layout Standard
21760 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21762 \begin_inset space ~
21766 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21767 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21776 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21781 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 The behavior was changed since
21791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21809 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21810 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21818 \begin_layout Standard
21821 \begin_inset space ~
21829 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21831 \begin_inset space ~
21834 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21839 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21840 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21842 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21847 If you used both literal and
21848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21855 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21857 \begin_inset space ~
21861 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21864 \begin_layout Subsection
21866 \begin_inset Index idx
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21880 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21887 \begin_layout Standard
21888 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21889 but automatically in the output.
21890 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21896 \begin_inset Index idx
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 following the rules of the document language.
21920 does not hyphenate text in the
21924 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21929 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21930 it only has problems with text in the
21934 font and with unusual constructs,
21936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21944 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21945 cannot break a word correctly,
21946 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21947 This is done with the menu
21949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21950 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21952 \begin_inset space ~
21959 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21960 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
21961 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
21963 \change_inserted -712698321 1697436627
21966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21973 that are common in word processors,
21975 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21977 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420769
21979 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420770
21983 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420699
21985 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420772
21988 hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21990 If no hyphenation is necessary
21991 \change_inserted -712698321 1697437057
21992 or the automatic hyphenation is disabled
21997 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420971
22001 \begin_layout Standard
22003 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22004 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
22005 does not hyphenate correctly,
22006 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
22007 how to hyphenate it by adding
22008 \change_deleted -712698321 1697438612
22010 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438615
22012 \change_deleted -712698321 1697439121
22014 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22016 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439144
22018 \begin_inset Flex Code
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440886
22026 hyphenation{<patterns>}
22034 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22036 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438635
22037 which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen
22038 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22041 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438465
22043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22047 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22050 \begin_inset Flex Code
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22058 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion
22059 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438644
22061 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22070 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439035
22071 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
22073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22078 \begin_inset Flex Code
22081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439080
22086 hyphenation{unbroken}
22094 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22096 If there are a lot of these
22097 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439099
22098 hyphenation exceptions
22099 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22101 you can collect them in a single file (say,
22103 \begin_inset Flex Code
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421096
22116 ) and then import the file via:
22118 \begin_inset Flex Code
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421113
22126 usepackage{myhyphens}
22134 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
22136 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439496
22139 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
22147 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22149 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440371
22153 \begin_layout Standard
22155 \change_inserted -712698321 1697456279
22157 \begin_inset Flex Code
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440909
22165 hyphenation{<patterns>}
22172 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
22173 this is usually the main language of the document).
22174 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
22175 the language packages
22183 provide specific variants of the command:
22186 \begin_layout Itemize
22188 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441197
22195 \begin_inset Flex Code
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441197
22203 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
22216 \begin_layout Itemize
22218 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441204
22225 \begin_inset Flex Code
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441204
22233 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
22243 \begin_layout Standard
22245 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441248
22247 depending on which language package you are using:
22250 \begin_layout Itemize
22252 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441311
22253 \begin_inset Flex Code
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441767
22261 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
22262 \begin_inset Newline newline
22265 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
22275 \begin_layout Itemize
22277 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441342
22278 \begin_inset Flex Code
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441342
22286 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
22298 \begin_layout Standard
22300 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441379
22301 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
22305 \begin_layout Itemize
22307 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441467
22308 \begin_inset Flex Code
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441467
22316 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
22326 \begin_layout Itemize
22328 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441476
22329 \begin_inset Flex Code
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441476
22337 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
22347 \begin_layout Standard
22349 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442003
22350 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
22353 \begin_layout Standard
22355 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442124
22356 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
22357 which is usually after the user preamble.
22358 So it is advised that you embrace them in
22359 \begin_inset Flex Code
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442087
22367 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
22376 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22381 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
22382 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
22383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22392 would then see the hyphen
22393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22400 as a line break possibility.
22401 A line break at this point would look ugly.
22402 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
22404 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
22406 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
22411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22412 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22414 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
22416 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22421 ) or put it into a makebox as described in
22422 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421188
22427 Prevent Hyphenation
22432 \begin_inset space ~
22440 \begin_layout Subsection
22442 \begin_inset Index idx
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22457 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22460 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22467 \begin_layout Standard
22468 When \SpecialChar LyX
22469 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22470 to generate the final version of your document,
22472 automatically distinguishes between words,
22477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22480 appropriate amount of space.
22481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22484 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22485 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22488 \begin_layout Standard
22490 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22503 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22504 it's the end of a sentence;
22505 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22506 it's an abbreviation.
22509 \begin_layout Standard
22510 Here are some examples of
22514 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22517 \begin_layout Itemize
22522 \begin_layout Itemize
22527 \begin_layout Standard
22528 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22531 \begin_layout Itemize
22533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22537 this is too much space!
22540 \begin_layout Itemize
22545 \begin_layout Standard
22546 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22549 \begin_layout Standard
22550 To fix this problem,
22551 use one of the following:
22554 \begin_layout Enumerate
22558 \begin_inset space ~
22563 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22564 \begin_inset space ~
22568 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22572 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22578 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22582 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22590 \begin_inset Index idx
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 \begin_layout Enumerate
22618 \begin_inset space ~
22623 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22624 \begin_inset space ~
22628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22630 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22636 \begin_inset Index idx
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22660 \begin_layout Enumerate
22664 \begin_inset space ~
22668 \begin_inset space ~
22672 \begin_inset space ~
22679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22681 \begin_inset space ~
22686 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22687 This function is also bound to
22690 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22696 \begin_layout Standard
22697 With the corrections,
22698 our earlier examples look like this:
22701 \begin_layout Itemize
22703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22707 \begin_inset space \space{}
22710 this is too much space!
22713 \begin_layout Itemize
22714 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22718 \begin_layout Standard
22719 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22720 If your language is such a language,
22721 you don't need to worry,
22722 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22723 will take care of this.
22726 \begin_layout Standard
22727 For those that do need to bother,
22728 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22732 \begin_inset space ~
22738 feature described in the section
22740 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22745 Additional Features
22750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22752 \begin_inset Index idx
22757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 \begin_inset Index idx
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 \begin_layout Standard
22800 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22802 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22803 and use a closing mark at the end.
22806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22814 The keyboard character,
22820 generates this automatically.
22823 \begin_layout Standard
22824 You can specify what character the
22828 key produces by using the submenu
22834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22838 \begin_inset Index idx
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22845 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 dialog and switching the
22863 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22864 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22866 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22868 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22872 \begin_inset space ~
22878 \begin_layout Labeling
22879 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22891 \begin_inset space ~
22895 \begin_inset space ~
22899 \begin_inset Quotes els
22903 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22917 \begin_inset Quotes els
22921 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22924 quotation marks (as common,
22926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22933 \begin_layout Labeling
22934 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22937 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22941 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22945 \begin_inset space ~
22949 \begin_inset space ~
22953 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22957 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22963 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22967 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22971 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22975 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22978 quotation marks (as common,
22980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22987 \begin_layout Labeling
22988 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22991 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22995 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22999 \begin_inset space ~
23003 \begin_inset space ~
23007 \begin_inset Quotes gls
23011 \begin_inset Quotes grs
23017 \begin_inset Quotes gld
23021 \begin_inset Quotes grd
23025 \begin_inset Quotes gls
23029 \begin_inset Quotes grs
23032 quotation marks (as common,
23034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23041 \begin_layout Labeling
23042 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23045 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23049 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23053 \begin_inset space ~
23057 \begin_inset space ~
23061 \begin_inset Quotes pls
23065 \begin_inset Quotes prs
23071 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23075 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23079 \begin_inset Quotes pls
23083 \begin_inset Quotes prs
23086 quotation marks (as common,
23088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23095 \begin_layout Labeling
23096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23099 \begin_inset Quotes cld
23103 \begin_inset Quotes crd
23107 \begin_inset space ~
23111 \begin_inset space ~
23115 \begin_inset Quotes cls
23119 \begin_inset Quotes crs
23125 \begin_inset Quotes cld
23129 \begin_inset Quotes crd
23133 \begin_inset Quotes cls
23137 \begin_inset Quotes crs
23140 quotation marks (as common,
23142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23149 \begin_layout Labeling
23150 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23153 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23157 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23161 \begin_inset space ~
23165 \begin_inset space ~
23169 \begin_inset Quotes als
23173 \begin_inset Quotes ars
23179 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23183 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23187 \begin_inset Quotes als
23191 \begin_inset Quotes ars
23194 quotation marks (as common,
23196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23203 \begin_layout Labeling
23204 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23207 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23211 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23215 \begin_inset space ~
23219 \begin_inset space ~
23223 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23227 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23233 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23237 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23241 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23245 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23248 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
23251 \begin_layout Labeling
23252 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23255 \begin_inset Quotes bld
23259 \begin_inset Quotes brd
23263 \begin_inset space ~
23267 \begin_inset space ~
23271 \begin_inset Quotes bls
23275 \begin_inset Quotes brs
23281 \begin_inset Quotes bld
23285 \begin_inset Quotes brd
23289 \begin_inset Quotes bls
23293 \begin_inset Quotes brs
23296 quotation marks (as common,
23298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23305 \begin_layout Labeling
23306 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23309 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23313 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23317 \begin_inset space ~
23321 \begin_inset space ~
23325 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23329 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23335 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23339 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23343 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23347 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23350 quotation marks (as common,
23352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23359 \begin_layout Labeling
23360 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23363 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23367 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23371 \begin_inset space ~
23375 \begin_inset space ~
23379 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23383 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23389 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23393 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23397 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23401 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23404 quotation marks (another style common in France)
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
23410 since these look identical to the inner marks.
23411 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
23419 \begin_layout Labeling
23420 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23423 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23427 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23431 \begin_inset space ~
23435 \begin_inset space ~
23439 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23443 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23449 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23453 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23457 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23461 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23464 quotation marks (as common,
23466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23473 \begin_layout Labeling
23474 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23477 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23481 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23485 \begin_inset space ~
23489 \begin_inset space ~
23493 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23497 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23503 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23507 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23511 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23515 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23518 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23519 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23523 \begin_layout Labeling
23524 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23526 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23529 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23533 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23537 \begin_inset space ~
23541 \begin_inset space ~
23545 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23549 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23557 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23565 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23573 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23581 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23586 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23591 \begin_layout Labeling
23592 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23593 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23601 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23607 \begin_inset space ~
23611 \begin_inset space ~
23617 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23625 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23629 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23633 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23637 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23641 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23644 quotation marks (as common,
23646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23656 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23659 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23665 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23673 \begin_layout Labeling
23674 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23675 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23683 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23689 \begin_inset space ~
23693 \begin_inset space ~
23699 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23707 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23711 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23715 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23719 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23723 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23726 quotation marks (as common,
23728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23732 in North Korea and China)
23733 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23735 \begin_inset script superscript
23737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23742 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23758 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23770 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963146
23774 \begin_layout Labeling
23775 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23777 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963188
23780 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23784 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23788 \begin_inset space ~
23792 \begin_inset space ~
23796 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23800 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23806 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23812 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23818 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23824 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23829 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23834 \begin_layout Standard
23835 Inner quotation marks
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 In many writing cultures,
23841 these are single quotation marks.
23842 But as the British and French styles show,
23843 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23851 does not necessarily mean
23852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23860 This is why we call them
23861 \begin_inset Quotes els
23865 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23881 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23883 \begin_inset Quotes els
23887 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23890 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23893 arg "quote-insert inner"
23898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23904 \begin_layout Standard
23906 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23908 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23909 even if the document-wide style changes.
23910 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23911 If you check the setting
23913 Use dynamic quotation marks
23917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23918 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23923 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23924 they appear in a special color).
23925 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23926 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23931 if your publisher requests a different style).
23934 \begin_layout Standard
23935 Individual quotation marks (i.
23936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23940 their level [inner,
23944 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23947 \begin_layout Subsection
23949 \begin_inset Index idx
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 \begin_inset Index idx
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23995 name "subsec:Ligatures"
24002 \begin_layout Standard
24003 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
24004 These groups are known as
24009 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
24010 knows about ligatures,
24011 your documents will contain them too in the output.
24012 Here are the standard ligatures:
24015 \begin_layout Itemize
24019 \begin_layout Itemize
24023 \begin_layout Itemize
24027 \begin_layout Itemize
24031 \begin_layout Itemize
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24036 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
24039 \begin_layout Standard
24041 you don't want a ligature in a word.
24042 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
24044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24051 it looks really weird in compound words,
24053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24068 To break a ligature,
24071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24072 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
24074 \begin_inset space ~
24081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24092 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
24094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24109 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
24111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24117 \begin_layout Subsection
24119 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
24121 \begin_inset Index idx
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 \begin_layout Standard
24149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24150 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
24155 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
24158 \begin_layout Description
24160 The name of the game.
24163 \begin_layout Description
24165 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
24169 \begin_layout Description
24171 The \SpecialChar TeX
24172 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
24176 \begin_layout Description
24177 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
24178 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24182 \begin_layout Standard
24183 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24189 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
24193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24197 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
24198 world to give programs geek version numbers.
24199 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
24200 converges to the number
24201 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
24205 The actual version is
24206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24215 the previous one was
24216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24227 \begin_layout Subsection
24229 \begin_inset Index idx
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 \begin_layout Standard
24254 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
24255 As you can see in the example below,
24256 it looks better when the space is smaller.
24258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24265 for units use the menu
24267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
24270 \begin_inset space ~
24278 arg "space-insert thin"
24284 \begin_layout Standard
24285 Here is an example to show the differences:
24288 \begin_layout Standard
24289 \begin_inset Tabular
24290 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
24291 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24292 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
24293 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 \begin_inset space ~
24304 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 space between number and unit
24323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24332 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 half space between number and unit
24357 \begin_layout Subsection
24359 \begin_inset Index idx
24364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24383 \begin_layout Standard
24384 In the early days of word processors,
24385 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
24386 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
24387 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
24388 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
24389 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
24390 These bits of text became known as
24401 \begin_layout Standard
24404 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
24405 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
24406 But what about widows and orphans,
24407 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
24408 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
24409 governing page breaks,
24410 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
24411 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
24412 you can add the commands
24413 \begin_inset Newline newline
24421 \begin_inset Newline newline
24429 \begin_inset Newline newline
24432 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24433 preamble of your document to avoid them.
24434 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
24436 \begin_inset space ~
24440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24442 key "latexcompanion"
24448 \begin_inset space ~
24452 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24459 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24460 's page break mechanism.
24463 \begin_layout Chapter
24467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24469 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
24476 \begin_layout Standard
24477 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24480 \begin_inset space ~
24486 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24489 \begin_layout Section
24491 \begin_inset Index idx
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24512 \begin_layout Standard
24514 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24517 \begin_layout Description
24520 \begin_inset space ~
24523 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24524 \begin_inset Newline newline
24528 \begin_inset Note Note
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24540 \begin_layout Description
24541 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24542 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24545 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24546 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24548 \begin_inset space ~
24554 \begin_inset Newline newline
24558 \begin_inset Note Comment
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24571 \begin_layout Description
24573 \begin_inset space ~
24576 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24578 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24580 \begin_inset space ~
24586 \begin_inset Newline newline
24590 \begin_inset Newline newline
24594 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24604 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24609 of a comment that appears in the output.
24615 \begin_inset Newline newline
24619 \begin_inset Newline newline
24622 As you can see in the example,
24623 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24626 \begin_layout Standard
24627 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24639 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24642 \begin_layout Section
24644 \begin_inset Index idx
24649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24658 name "sec:Footnotes"
24665 \begin_layout Standard
24667 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24668 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24673 or the toolbar button
24676 arg "footnote-insert"
24690 \begin_inset Graphics
24691 filename clipart/footnote.png
24700 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24701 's representation of your footnote.
24711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24735 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24736 Clicking on the box label again will close
24749 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24750 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24765 \begin_layout Standard
24766 Here is an example footnote:
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24775 To close a footnote,
24776 click on the footnote box label.
24784 \begin_layout Standard
24785 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24786 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24787 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24788 according to the document class.
24790 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24791 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24797 ey are described in the
24800 \begin_inset space ~
24808 \begin_layout Section
24810 \begin_inset Index idx
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24824 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24831 \begin_layout Standard
24832 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24834 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24838 \begin_inset space ~
24843 or the toolbar button
24846 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24873 appearing within your text.
24874 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24875 's representation of your margin
24884 \begin_layout Standard
24885 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24889 \begin_inset Marginal
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24894 This is a marginal note.
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24904 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24905 right on odd pages.
24908 \begin_layout Standard
24909 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24912 \begin_inset space ~
24920 \begin_inset space ~
24928 \begin_layout Section
24929 Graphics and Images
24930 \begin_inset Index idx
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 \begin_inset Index idx
24947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24956 name "sec:Graphics"
24963 \begin_layout Standard
24964 To insert an image in your document,
24965 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24968 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24977 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24986 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24987 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24988 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24989 \begin_inset space ~
24993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24995 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
25003 \begin_layout Standard
25008 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
25009 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
25012 \begin_inset space ~
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25025 \begin_inset space ~
25029 \begin_inset space ~
25033 \begin_inset space ~
25038 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
25039 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
25046 \begin_layout Standard
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25059 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
25060 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
25062 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
25067 \begin_inset space ~
25072 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
25073 only a frame with the image size is printed.
25076 \begin_layout Standard
25077 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
25078 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
25079 This is an example image within a separate,
25080 horizontally centered paragraph:
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25085 \begin_inset Graphics
25086 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
25094 \begin_layout Standard
25095 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
25096 you have to put the image into a float,
25098 \begin_inset space ~
25102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25104 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25112 \begin_layout Subsection
25114 \begin_inset Index idx
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25121 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25138 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25146 You can insert images in any known file format.
25147 But as we explained in section
25148 \begin_inset space ~
25152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25154 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
25160 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
25162 therefore uses the program
25166 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
25167 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
25168 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
25169 \begin_inset space ~
25173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25175 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
25183 \begin_layout Standard
25184 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
25187 \begin_layout Description
25189 \begin_inset space ~
25192 images consist of pixel values,
25193 often in a compressed form.
25194 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
25195 Well-known bitmap image formats are
25196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25199 Graphics Interchange Format
25200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25217 \begin_inset Index idx
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25243 Portable Network Graphics
25244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25261 \begin_inset Index idx
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25287 Joint Photographic Experts Group
25288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25317 \begin_inset Index idx
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 \begin_layout Description
25343 \begin_inset space ~
25346 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
25347 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
25348 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
25349 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
25350 \begin_inset Newline newline
25353 Scalable image formats can be
25354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25357 Scalable Vector Graphics
25358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25375 \begin_inset Index idx
25380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25401 Encapsulated PostScript
25402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25419 \begin_inset Index idx
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25445 Portable Document Format
25446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25463 \begin_inset Index idx
25468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25484 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25485 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25490 In the case of PDF,
25491 the original image is additionally compressed.
25499 \begin_layout Standard
25500 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25508 \begin_layout Subsection
25509 Grouping of Image Settings
25510 \begin_inset Index idx
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25517 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 \begin_layout Standard
25535 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25536 Images within such a group share their settings,
25537 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25538 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25541 \begin_layout Standard
25542 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25545 \begin_inset space ~
25549 \begin_inset space ~
25561 \begin_inset space ~
25565 \begin_inset space ~
25571 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25574 \begin_layout Section
25576 \begin_inset Index idx
25581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25597 \begin_layout Standard
25598 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25601 arg "tabular-insert"
25606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25610 A dialog will appear,
25611 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25612 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25614 and you can select a specific (border) style
25617 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25618 This separation appears due to a double line:
25619 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25620 Here is an example table:
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25625 \begin_inset Tabular
25626 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25627 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25628 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25629 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25825 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25829 \begin_layout Standard
25831 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25832 This corresponds to the
25833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25840 table style listed in the style selection.
25843 \begin_layout Standard
25845 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25846 Other available styles include:
25849 \begin_layout Itemize
25851 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25860 which looks line the above table,
25861 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25864 \begin_layout Itemize
25866 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25867 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25870 \begin_layout Itemize
25872 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25881 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25892 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25893 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25898 \begin_layout Standard
25900 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25901 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25904 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25908 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25909 you should alter this setting.
25912 \begin_layout Subsection
25916 \begin_layout Standard
25917 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25919 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25923 This brings up the table dialog.
25924 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25925 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25926 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25927 This means that if you select more cells,
25928 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25931 \begin_layout Standard
25932 In addition to the table dialog,
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25941 helps you in setting table properties.
25942 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25945 \begin_layout Standard
25949 \begin_inset space ~
25954 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25955 If you add a row or column,
25956 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25957 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25958 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25960 \begin_inset space ~
25964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25966 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25974 \begin_layout Standard
25975 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25984 This will merge the cells to
25989 spread over more than one column/row.
25990 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25991 so that the alignment,
25993 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25994 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25997 \begin_layout Standard
25999 \begin_inset Tabular
26000 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
26001 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
26002 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26003 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
26004 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
26005 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26101 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26136 \begin_layout Standard
26137 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
26138 -arguments for the table.
26139 They are necessary for special table formatting,
26140 such as the multirow cells,
26141 explained in the chapter
26148 \begin_inset space ~
26154 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
26155 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
26156 but are visible in the output.
26159 \begin_layout Standard
26160 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26169 Most DVI-viewers are
26173 able to display rotations.
26181 \begin_layout Standard
26186 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
26191 adds lines for all cell borders.
26194 \begin_layout Subsection
26196 \begin_inset Index idx
26201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26218 \begin_inset Index idx
26223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26232 \begin_layout Standard
26233 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
26234 you can use the option
26237 \begin_inset space ~
26241 \begin_inset space ~
26249 \begin_inset space ~
26254 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
26255 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
26258 \begin_layout Description
26264 The current row and all rows above,
26265 that don't have any special options defined,
26266 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
26267 Except for the first page,
26271 \begin_inset space ~
26279 \begin_layout Description
26283 \begin_inset space ~
26289 The current row and all rows above,
26290 that don't have any special options defined,
26291 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
26294 \begin_layout Description
26300 The current row and all rows below,
26301 that don't have any special options defined,
26302 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
26303 except for the last page,
26307 \begin_inset space ~
26315 \begin_layout Description
26319 \begin_inset space ~
26325 The current row and all rows below,
26326 that don't have any special options defined,
26327 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
26330 \begin_layout Description
26332 The first row is reset as a single column.
26333 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
26335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26339 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
26342 \begin_inset space ~
26350 \begin_layout Standard
26351 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
26352 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
26353 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
26354 the others will be defined as
26360 first means first in this order:
26365 \begin_inset space ~
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26385 see the following longtable to see how it works:
26388 \begin_layout Standard
26390 \begin_inset Tabular
26391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
26392 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
26393 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
26394 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26395 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26396 <row endfirsthead="true">
26397 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26403 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
26408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 <row endfirsthead="true">
26428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26439 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26448 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26460 <row endhead="true">
26461 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26491 <row endhead="true">
26492 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26524 <row endfoot="true">
26525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26576 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27527 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28508 <row endlastfoot="true">
28509 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28520 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28546 \begin_layout Subsection
28548 \begin_inset Index idx
28553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28572 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28579 \begin_layout Standard
28580 A table cell can contain text,
28584 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28585 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28586 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28592 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28595 \begin_layout Standard
28596 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28597 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28598 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28602 \begin_layout Standard
28604 \begin_inset Tabular
28605 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28606 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28608 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28698 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 This is longer now.
28759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28810 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28811 This is longer now.
28816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28843 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28844 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28849 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28854 Selection with the mouse or with
28858 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28859 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28862 \begin_layout Section
28864 \begin_inset Index idx
28869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28885 \begin_layout Subsection
28889 \begin_layout Standard
28890 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28891 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28900 forward or backward a page or two,
28901 to wherever it fits best.
28909 \begin_inset space ~
28915 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28918 \begin_layout Standard
28919 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28920 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28921 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28922 every float can be referenced in the text.
28923 Floats are therefore numbered.
28924 Referencing is described in section
28925 \begin_inset space ~
28929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28931 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28939 \begin_layout Standard
28943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28947 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28948 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28949 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28950 \begin_inset Index idx
28955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28957 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28971 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28972 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28973 -document readable,
28974 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28975 A closed float box looks like this:
28977 \begin_inset Graphics
28978 filename clipart/float.png
28983 – a gray button with a red label.
28986 \begin_layout Standard
28987 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28988 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28991 \begin_layout Subsection
28993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28995 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
29000 \begin_inset Index idx
29005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29024 \begin_layout Standard
29026 \begin_inset space ~
29030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29032 reference "fig:A-star-in"
29037 was created using the menu
29039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29040 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29046 arg "float-insert figure"
29050 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
29052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29058 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
29062 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
29064 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29066 \begin_inset space ~
29074 arg "layout-paragraph"
29080 \begin_layout Standard
29081 \begin_inset Float figure
29088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29090 \begin_inset Graphics
29091 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29101 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29106 name "fig:A-star-in"
29123 \begin_layout Standard
29124 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
29125 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
29127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29136 ) and refer to it using the menu
29138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29144 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29148 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
29149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29158 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29159 will reposition the floats in the final document,
29161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29169 For more about cross-references,
29171 \begin_inset space ~
29175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29177 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29185 \begin_layout Standard
29186 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
29187 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
29188 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
29189 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
29190 \begin_inset space ~
29194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29196 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29203 \begin_inset space ~
29207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29209 reference "fig:Two-images"
29214 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
29215 You can also set the images one below the other.
29217 \begin_inset space ~
29221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29223 reference "fig:Undefinable"
29229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29231 reference "fig:Star"
29236 are the subfigures.
29239 \begin_layout Standard
29240 \begin_inset Float figure
29247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29248 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29252 \begin_inset Float figure
29259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29260 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29265 name "fig:Undefinable"
29277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29278 \begin_inset Graphics
29279 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
29291 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29295 \begin_inset Float figure
29302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29303 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29321 \begin_inset Graphics
29322 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29334 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29341 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29346 name "fig:Two-images"
29363 \begin_layout Subsection
29365 \begin_inset Index idx
29370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29372 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29389 \begin_layout Standard
29390 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
29392 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29393 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29396 or the toolbar button
29399 arg "float-insert table"
29403 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
29405 \begin_inset space ~
29409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29411 reference "tab:Table-float"
29419 \begin_layout Standard
29420 \begin_inset Float table
29427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29428 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29433 name "tab:Table-float"
29445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29447 \begin_inset Tabular
29448 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
29449 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29450 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29451 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29452 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29579 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29600 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29603 \end{array}\right]$
29611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29624 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29645 \begin_layout Subsection
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29654 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29671 \begin_layout Standard
29673 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29674 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29675 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29676 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29683 \begin_inset space ~
29691 \begin_layout Section
29693 \begin_inset Index idx
29698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29709 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29712 all the usual rules of indentation,
29715 \begin_inset space \space{}
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29723 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29729 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29734 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29744 height_special "totalheight"
29749 backgroundcolor "none"
29752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29755 This is a minipage.
29756 The text is set in an italic style.
29759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29762 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29771 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29774 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29779 as described in section
29780 \begin_inset space ~
29784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29786 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29792 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29798 \begin_layout Standard
29799 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29809 height_special "totalheight"
29814 backgroundcolor "none"
29817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29818 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29819 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29825 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29829 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29839 height_special "totalheight"
29844 backgroundcolor "none"
29847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29848 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29849 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29857 \begin_layout Standard
29858 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29866 you can transform the box to another box type.
29867 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29874 \begin_inset space ~
29882 \begin_layout Chapter
29883 Mathematical Formulas
29884 \begin_inset Index idx
29889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 \begin_inset Index idx
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29903 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29920 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29928 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29933 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29936 \begin_layout Section
29938 \begin_inset Index idx
29943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29945 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29963 To create a math formula,
29964 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29977 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29978 with purple markers around its corners.
29979 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29980 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29981 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29990 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29993 \begin_inset space ~
29999 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
30002 \begin_layout Standard
30003 There are two main types of formulas,
30004 inline formulas and display formulas.
30005 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
30009 \begin_layout Standard
30010 This is a line with an inline formula
30011 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30018 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
30020 \begin_inset Formula
30027 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
30030 \begin_layout Standard
30032 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30050 followed by a space,
30051 in a formula will create the Greek letter
30052 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
30056 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30067 \begin_layout Subsection
30068 Navigating in Formulas
30069 \begin_inset Index idx
30074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30076 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30094 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
30096 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
30097 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
30102 will leave a formula construct (a square root
30103 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
30108 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
30113 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
30116 \end{array}\right]$
30124 will leave the formula,
30125 placing the cursor after the formula.
30130 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
30132 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
30135 \begin_layout Standard
30141 printed in this document as
30142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30146 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30154 seems to do nothing in a formula,
30155 since it does not add a space between characters,
30156 but it does exit a nested structure.
30158 you have to be careful about using
30165 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
30174 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30184 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30188 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30194 since in the latter case only the
30197 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
30202 will be under the square root sign:
30204 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
30210 \begin_layout Standard
30211 You can leave many parts of a formula,
30213 partially filled in,
30215 \begin_inset Formula
30217 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
30226 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
30227 or a subscript with nothing in it,
30228 the results will be unpredictable,
30229 but most constructs don't mind.
30232 \begin_layout Subsection
30236 \begin_layout Standard
30237 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
30238 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
30243 and a cursor movement key to select text.
30244 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
30246 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
30247 That text can then be cut or copied,
30248 and then pasted within any formula,
30249 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
30253 \begin_layout Subsection
30254 Exponents and Subscripts
30255 \begin_inset Index idx
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30277 \begin_inset Index idx
30282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30301 \begin_layout Standard
30302 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
30305 arg "math-superscript"
30311 arg "math-subscript"
30315 but it is often much easier to use a command.
30317 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
30324 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30334 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
30341 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
30346 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
30353 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30359 If you use characters in the superscript,
30360 that could be accented with the circumflex
30361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30369 you have to use an extra
30373 to separate the circumflex and the character.
30376 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
30383 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30389 Subscripts are similar:
30391 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
30398 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30406 \begin_layout Subsection
30408 \begin_inset Index idx
30413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30433 Create a fraction either with the command
30439 or by using the icon
30442 arg "math-insert \\frac"
30448 \begin_inset space ~
30454 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
30455 The cursor is above the fraction line.
30456 To move it to the bottom,
30468 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
30469 as this example shows:
30470 \begin_inset Formula
30472 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
30475 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30483 \begin_layout Subsection
30485 \begin_inset Index idx
30490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30492 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30510 Roots can be created using the
30513 \begin_inset space ~
30521 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30527 arg "math-insert \\root"
30549 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30557 always produces a square root.
30560 \begin_layout Subsection
30561 Operators with Limits
30562 \begin_inset Index idx
30567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30569 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30584 \begin_inset Index idx
30589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30608 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30617 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30621 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30624 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30625 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30626 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30627 directly after the symbol.
30628 The sum operator will automatically place its
30629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30636 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30637 and to the side in inline formulas,
30639 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30644 \begin_inset Formula
30646 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30653 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30658 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30661 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30663 \begin_inset space ~
30667 \begin_inset space ~
30681 \begin_layout Standard
30682 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30692 \begin_inset Index idx
30697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30699 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30714 \begin_inset Formula
30716 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30721 which will place the
30722 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30734 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30736 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30742 \begin_layout Standard
30743 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30750 Have a look at section
30751 \begin_inset space ~
30755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30757 reference "subsec:Functions"
30762 for an explanation of function macros.
30765 \begin_layout Subsection
30767 \begin_inset Index idx
30772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30774 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 \begin_layout Standard
30792 Most math symbols can be found in the
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30800 under one of several categories;
30821 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30824 \begin_layout Standard
30825 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30826 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30827 you don't have to use the
30830 \begin_inset space ~
30836 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30838 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30841 \begin_layout Subsection
30843 \begin_inset Index idx
30848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30850 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30874 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30880 \begin_inset space ~
30888 arg "math-insert \\space"
30892 This generates a small space,
30893 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30901 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30904 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30906 \begin_inset Graphics
30907 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30912 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30913 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30914 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30916 because they are negative spaces.
30917 Here are two examples:
30920 \begin_layout Standard
30931 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30937 \begin_layout Standard
30948 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30954 \begin_layout Subsection
30956 \begin_inset Index idx
30961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30980 name "subsec:Functions"
30987 \begin_layout Standard
30991 \begin_inset space ~
30996 contains under the button
30999 arg "math-insert \\functions"
31002 a number of function macros,
31004 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
31009 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
31018 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
31025 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
31027 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
31031 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
31037 \begin_layout Standard
31038 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
31040 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
31044 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
31050 \begin_layout Standard
31051 For some mathematical objects,
31053 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
31054 as described in section
31055 \begin_inset space ~
31059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31061 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
31069 \begin_layout Subsection
31071 \begin_inset Index idx
31076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31095 \begin_layout Standard
31096 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
31097 This may depend on your keyboard,
31098 or the bindings file you use.
31099 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31103 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
31106 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
31107 Our example is entered by typing
31112 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
31119 \begin_inset space ~
31123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31125 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
31130 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
31133 \begin_layout Standard
31134 \begin_inset Float table
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31147 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
31151 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
31159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31161 \begin_inset Tabular
31162 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
31163 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31165 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31166 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31250 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
31260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31304 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
31314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31358 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
31368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31412 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
31422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31466 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
31476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31520 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31574 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31628 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31682 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31727 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31752 \begin_inset space ~
31760 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31764 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31767 \begin_layout Section
31768 Brackets and Delimiters
31769 \begin_inset Index idx
31774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31776 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31791 \begin_inset Index idx
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31815 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31822 \begin_layout Standard
31823 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31826 using just the keys
31831 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31832 like a matrix or a fraction,
31833 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31834 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31837 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31842 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31843 \begin_inset Formula
31845 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31853 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31855 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31858 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31861 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31867 \begin_inset Formula
31869 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31878 If you use the delimiter icon,
31880 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31883 \begin_layout Standard
31884 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31885 If you use the option
31888 \begin_inset space ~
31894 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31895 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31897 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31903 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31904 with a dotted line,
31905 but nothing will be printed.
31908 \begin_layout Standard
31909 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31910 like a square root,
31911 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31912 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31917 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31920 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31922 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31923 select the structure and enter
31926 arg "math-delim ( )"
31932 \begin_layout Section
31933 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31934 \begin_inset Index idx
31939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31941 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31956 \begin_inset Index idx
31961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31963 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31978 \begin_inset Index idx
31983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31985 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31989 Multi-line Equations
32002 \begin_layout Standard
32003 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32015 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
32019 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
32020 Here is an example:
32021 \begin_inset Formula
32023 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
32032 The parentheses aren't automatic,
32033 but you can add them as described in section
32034 \begin_inset space ~
32038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32040 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
32046 When you construct the matrix,
32047 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
32049 or center-justified.
32050 This alignment is set in the box
32055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32106 for every column as default.
32109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32120 means that the first column will be left-justified,
32121 the second will be centered,
32122 and the third column will be right-justified,
32123 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
32124 The result will look like this:
32125 \begin_inset Formula
32128 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
32129 column & has & has\,right\\
32130 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
32143 arg "newline-insert newline"
32146 while the cursor is in the matrix.
32147 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
32149 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32152 or the math toolbar.
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32156 There are other arrays used in formulas,
32157 such as distinctions of cases.
32158 It can be created with the menu
32160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32161 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32163 \begin_inset space ~
32175 Here is an example:
32177 \begin_inset Formula
32191 \begin_layout Standard
32192 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32195 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
32198 arg "newline-insert newline"
32202 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
32203 one for each column.
32207 arg "newline-insert newline"
32210 in a non-empty formula,
32211 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
32212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32219 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
32220 the relation sign is in the second column,
32221 and the rest in the third column.
32222 A new row is created by every further entry of
32225 arg "newline-insert newline"
32229 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
32230 Here is an example:
32231 \begin_inset Formula
32233 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
32234 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
32239 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
32240 \begin_inset Formula
32242 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
32250 \begin_layout Standard
32251 The multi-line formula type described here is called
32258 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
32259 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
32260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32262 reference "eq:asquared"
32268 The other types are described in section
32269 \begin_inset space ~
32273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32275 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
32283 \begin_layout Section
32284 Formula Numbering and Referencing
32285 \begin_inset Index idx
32290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32307 \begin_inset Index idx
32312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32318 Referencing formulas
32329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32331 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
32338 \begin_layout Standard
32339 To number a formula,
32340 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
32342 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32343 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32345 \begin_inset space ~
32349 \begin_inset space ~
32357 arg "math-number-toggle"
32361 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32362 within parentheses.
32363 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
32364 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
32365 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
32366 separated by a dot:
32367 \begin_inset Formula
32377 arg "math-number-toggle"
32380 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
32381 You can only number displayed formulas.
32384 \begin_layout Standard
32385 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
32388 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32389 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32395 \begin_inset space ~
32403 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
32406 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
32407 \begin_inset Formula
32410 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
32416 To number all lines use the shortcut
32419 arg "math-number-toggle"
32425 \begin_layout Standard
32426 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32429 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
32430 A label is inserted with the menu
32432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32441 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
32442 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
32443 It is recommended that you use the suggested
32444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32455 as the first part of the label,
32456 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
32457 We inserted in the following example the label
32458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32465 in the second line:
32466 \begin_inset Formula
32468 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
32469 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
32474 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
32475 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
32476 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
32478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32480 \begin_inset space ~
32488 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32492 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32493 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32494 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32498 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32501 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32510 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32511 's cross-reference box are described in section
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32518 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32525 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32532 \begin_layout Section
32533 User defined math macros
32534 \begin_inset Index idx
32539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32541 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32558 \begin_layout Standard
32560 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32561 Math macros are explained in section
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32576 \begin_layout Section
32580 \begin_layout Subsection
32582 \begin_inset Index idx
32587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32607 The standard font for text is italic,
32608 for numbers the standard is roman.
32609 To set a font in a formula,
32613 \begin_inset space ~
32621 arg "math-insert \\font"
32625 or enter its command,
32627 \begin_inset space ~
32631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32633 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32642 \begin_layout Standard
32643 \begin_inset Float table
32650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32651 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32656 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32660 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32670 \begin_inset Tabular
32671 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32672 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32673 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32674 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32733 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32760 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32793 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32842 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32848 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32849 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32862 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32878 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32912 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32934 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32940 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32948 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32961 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32977 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33011 \begin_layout Standard
33012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33021 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
33024 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
33027 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
33031 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
33051 \begin_layout Standard
33052 When you use a typeface,
33053 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
33054 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
33059 within the box will set the cursor outside,
33060 so that you have to use a
33061 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
33063 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
33066 space when you need a space in the box.
33067 Here is an example where
33068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33079 denotes the set of numbers:
33080 \begin_inset Formula
33082 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
33090 \begin_layout Standard
33091 The typefaces are nestable,
33092 which can cause confusion.
33105 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
33109 \begin_inset Newline newline
33112 So it is better not to use this feature.
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33116 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
33118 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
33122 \begin_inset Newline newline
33125 You can only print them emboldened using the command
33132 which works like the other typeface commands:
33134 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
33140 \begin_layout Standard
33147 works for all symbols,
33152 \begin_layout Standard
33153 A number of other font options are available as well,
33156 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33157 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
33159 \begin_inset space ~
33167 \begin_layout Subsection
33169 \begin_inset Index idx
33174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33176 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33194 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
33196 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
33197 which is obtained using the entry
33200 \begin_inset space ~
33204 \begin_inset space ~
33212 \begin_inset space ~
33220 arg "math-insert \\font"
33224 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
33225 in black instead of blue.
33226 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
33227 Here is an example:
33228 \begin_inset Formula
33231 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
33232 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
33241 \begin_layout Subsection
33243 \begin_inset Index idx
33248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33250 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33267 \begin_layout Standard
33268 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
33269 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
33290 For most characters,
33299 are actually the same size,
33301 superscripts and subscripts,
33302 and certain other structures,
33308 Except for some operators,
33309 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
33310 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
33311 thinks are appropriate.
33312 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
33315 arg "math-insert \\style"
33319 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
33322 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
33326 which is normally in
33337 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
33341 The four styles are used in the following example:
33344 \begin_layout Standard
33345 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
33350 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
33355 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
33360 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33367 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
33369 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33377 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
33379 if the base font size of the document is changed,
33380 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
33381 As an example here is a formula in the font size
33382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33396 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
33402 \begin_layout Section
33403 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33405 \begin_inset Index idx
33410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33417 \begin_inset Index idx
33422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33424 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33443 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
33446 \begin_layout Subsection
33447 Enabling AMS-Support
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33451 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
33452 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
33468 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
33469 selecting the checkbox
33472 \begin_inset space ~
33476 \begin_inset space ~
33480 \begin_inset space ~
33489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset Index idx
33498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33517 \begin_inset space ~
33523 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33524 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33525 -errors in formulas,
33526 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33529 \begin_layout Subsection
33531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33533 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33538 \begin_inset Index idx
33543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33549 Multi-line Equations
33562 \begin_layout Standard
33563 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33564 provides a selection of different formula types.
33566 allows you to choose between
33591 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33593 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33601 for an explanation of these formula types.
33604 \begin_layout Chapter
33608 \begin_layout Section
33610 \begin_inset Index idx
33615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33624 name "sec:Cross-References"
33631 \begin_layout Standard
33632 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33633 's strengths is cross-references.
33634 You can reference every section,
33638 and list in the document.
33639 To reference a document part,
33640 you have to insert a label into it.
33641 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33642 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33645 \begin_layout Enumerate
33649 \begin_layout Enumerate
33650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33652 name "enu:Second-item"
33659 \begin_layout Enumerate
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33669 or by pressing the toolbar button
33676 A gray label box like this:
33678 \begin_inset Graphics
33679 filename clipart/label.png
33683 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33685 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33686 in our case the text
33687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33720 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33722 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33723 the suggested prefix will be
33724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33739 To reference the item,
33740 we refer to its label using the menu
33742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33745 or the toolbar button
33748 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33752 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33754 \begin_inset Graphics
33755 filename clipart/reference.png
33759 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33760 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33773 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33776 \begin_layout Standard
33777 As an alternative to
33779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33783 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33788 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33790 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33802 \begin_layout Standard
33803 Here is our cross-reference:
33805 \begin_inset space ~
33809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33811 reference "enu:Second-item"
33819 \begin_layout Standard
33820 It is recommended to use a
33821 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33823 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33831 described in section
33832 \begin_inset space ~
33836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33838 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33848 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33855 \begin_layout Description
33858 this is the default:
33860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33862 reference "fig:Two-images"
33870 \begin_layout Description
33872 prints the number within two parentheses,
33873 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33874 especially when the reference name
33875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33886 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33894 \begin_layout Description
33896 prints the page number:
33898 \begin_inset space ~
33902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33903 LatexCommand pageref
33904 reference "fig:Two-images"
33912 \begin_layout Description
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33918 \begin_inset space ~
33922 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33925 LatexCommand vpageref
33926 reference "fig:Two-images"
33932 \begin_inset Newline newline
33935 If the label is on the same page,
33936 it prints “on this page”;
33937 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33938 it prints “on the facing page”;
33939 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33940 it prints “on the previous page”;
33941 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33942 it prints “on the next page”.
33943 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33946 \begin_layout Description
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33961 the text “on page” and the page number:
33963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33965 reference "fig:Two-images"
33971 \begin_inset Newline newline
33974 If the label is on the same page,
33975 this format behaves like
33982 otherwise it behaves like
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33990 \begin_inset space ~
33999 \begin_layout Description
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34005 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
34006 \begin_inset Newline newline
34010 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34019 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34029 \begin_inset Index idx
34034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34037 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34052 \begin_inset Index idx
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34080 \begin_inset Newline newline
34083 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
34084 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
34086 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
34090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34091 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34099 is the default and preferred because
34103 supports only English documents.
34104 The format is specified by using the command
34108 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
34117 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34118 preamble of the document.
34119 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
34120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34136 \begin_inset Newline newline
34143 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
34148 \begin_inset Newline newline
34159 predefines reference formats for all available types.
34160 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
34161 So if you want to make formatted references to,
34164 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
34170 you might do so as follows:
34171 \begin_inset Newline newline
34178 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
34179 format{prop}{Proposition
34184 \begin_inset Newline newline
34187 For more information about defining formatted references,
34188 have a look at the package documentation
34189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34191 key "prettyref,refstyle"
34197 \begin_inset Newline newline
34208 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
34213 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34215 \begin_inset Newline newline
34218 If you activate the option
34219 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042040
34221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34225 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34228 Format cross-references in work area
34229 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042041
34233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34237 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34240 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
34243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34251 rather than just displaying the label.
34256 \begin_layout Description
34258 \begin_inset space ~
34262 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
34264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34265 LatexCommand nameref
34266 reference "fig:Two-images"
34274 \begin_layout Description
34276 \begin_inset space ~
34280 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34281 label for the reference:
34283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34284 LatexCommand labelonly
34285 reference "fig:Two-images"
34291 \begin_inset Newline newline
34294 This allows for customization,
34295 using \SpecialChar TeX
34297 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
34304 then you may want to use the
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34313 which will output only the part of the reference following the
34314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34322 This is the form needed for e.
34323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34327 \begin_inset space \space{}
34334 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34336 The varieties are adjusted in the field
34340 of the cross-reference window,
34341 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 You can only use the style
34349 to reference numbered document parts,
34350 while the reference style
34354 is always possible.
34357 \begin_layout Standard
34358 If you want to reference a section,
34359 put the label in the section heading;
34360 for floats put the label in the caption;
34361 for footnotes put the label in it.
34362 Referencing formulas is explained in section
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34369 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_inset space ~
34391 sets the cursor before the referenced label
34392 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632729
34395 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632729
34397 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34398 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label
34399 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632734
34401 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34403 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632735
34407 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
34410 \begin_inset space ~
34415 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
34416 You can also go back with the toolbar button
34419 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
34423 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
34428 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34429 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
34437 \begin_layout Standard
34438 You can change labels at any time.
34439 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
34440 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
34442 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
34443 change them all manually
34448 \begin_layout Standard
34449 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
34450 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
34451 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 References are described in detail in the section
34466 \begin_layout Section
34467 Table of Contents and other Listings
34468 \begin_inset Index idx
34473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 \begin_inset Index idx
34485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34502 \begin_inset Index idx
34507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34523 \begin_layout Subsection
34525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34527 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34534 \begin_layout Standard
34535 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34538 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34540 \begin_inset space ~
34544 \begin_inset space ~
34550 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34552 If you click on it,
34558 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34559 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34560 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34562 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34564 \begin_inset space ~
34569 that is described in section
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34576 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34586 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34587 as described in section
34588 \begin_inset space ~
34592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34594 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34600 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34608 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34613 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34614 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34617 \begin_layout Subsection
34620 Listings and Algorithms
34621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34623 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34630 \begin_layout Standard
34633 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34634 You can insert them via the
34636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34637 List/Contents/References
34640 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34643 \begin_layout Section
34644 URLs and Hyperlinks
34645 \begin_inset Index idx
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34657 \begin_inset Index idx
34662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34671 \begin_layout Subsection
34673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34683 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34691 \begin_layout Standard
34692 Here is an example URL:
34696 \begin_inset Flex URL
34699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34701 https://www.lyx.org
34709 \begin_layout Standard
34711 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34712 You cannot change the style of the link text
34713 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34717 the URL text will always be in the style
34723 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34724 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34727 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34733 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34735 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34743 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34767 (use whatever the current text font is).
34768 To have italicized URLs,
34772 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34774 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34786 \begin_layout Standard
34788 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34789 To be able to format the URL text,
34790 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34792 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34796 \begin_layout Standard
34798 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34800 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34802 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34804 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34805 between lines at certain characters,
34809 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34811 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34822 \begin_layout Standard
34824 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34825 It does not break at a hyphen (
34830 but you can change that by adding
34835 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34837 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34842 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34843 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34847 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34850 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34852 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34854 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34856 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34858 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34859 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34860 a last resort is to put
34863 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34867 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34871 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34874 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34875 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34880 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34881 in the preamble then the
34882 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34884 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34886 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34888 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34890 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34892 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34894 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34895 be broken at every character.
34897 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34903 \begin_layout Standard
34904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34913 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34914 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34923 \begin_layout Subsection
34925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34927 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34934 \begin_layout Standard
34935 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34940 or with the toolbar button
34947 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34957 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34958 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34962 name "LyX's homepage"
34963 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34969 an Email address like this:
34971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34973 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34974 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34982 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34986 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34987 or any other valid URI (such as
34998 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35006 \begin_layout Standard
35007 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
35008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35020 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
35022 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35028 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
35029 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
35030 To set the format of the link text,
35031 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
35032 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
35037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35039 name "LyX's homepage"
35040 target "https://www.lyx.org"
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35049 The link text color can be changed,
35054 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
35056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35061 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
35062 \begin_inset Newline newline
35070 \begin_inset Newline newline
35077 in the PDF Properties dialog.
35078 \change_inserted 5863208 1686630948
35082 \begin_layout Standard
35084 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35085 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
35086 you can use context menu (or
35087 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813434
35089 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35093 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813424
35097 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35099 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
35103 \begin_layout Section
35105 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
35107 \begin_inset Index idx
35112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35121 name "sec:Counters"
35128 \begin_layout Standard
35130 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35131 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35132 is its ability to manage counters.
35134 this is handled automatically,
35135 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
35136 This can be done in
35137 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
35139 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
35142 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35143 using the counter inset,
35144 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
35145 This allows one to set a counter's value;
35146 to reset it (to zero);
35150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35152 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
35153 Note that the section counter,
35155 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
35157 if you want the next section to be section five,
35159 then you need to set the section counter to four.
35166 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
35167 since the value added can be negative);
35169 to restore the saved value;
35170 and to print the value.
35171 These effects can also be limited to
35172 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
35174 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
35177 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35179 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
35181 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
35183 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
35186 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35190 \begin_layout Standard
35192 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
35193 There are five commands you can use:
35196 \begin_layout Enumerate
35198 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
35204 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
35207 \begin_layout Enumerate
35209 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
35215 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
35216 if you choose a negative number)
35219 \begin_layout Enumerate
35221 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
35227 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
35230 \begin_layout Enumerate
35232 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
35235 Save value of counter:
35238 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
35241 \begin_layout Enumerate
35243 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
35246 Restore value of counter:
35249 Restores the previously saved value.
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35254 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
35255 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
35260 \begin_layout Section
35262 \begin_inset Index idx
35267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35276 name "sec:Appendices"
35283 \begin_layout Standard
35284 Appendices are created with the menu
35286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35288 \begin_inset space ~
35292 \begin_inset space ~
35298 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
35299 This part is marked with a red borderline.
35302 \begin_layout Standard
35303 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
35304 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
35305 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
35306 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35312 \begin_inset space ~
35316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35318 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
35328 \begin_inset space ~
35332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35334 reference "subsec:Export"
35342 \begin_layout Section
35344 \begin_inset Index idx
35349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35358 name "sec:Bibliography"
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
35368 You can include a bibliography database,
35369 which is explained in sec.
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35376 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35385 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
35386 using the paragraph environment
35391 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
35392 \begin_inset space ~
35396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35398 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
35404 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
35405 such as author-year citations,
35406 and if you have more than a handful of references,
35407 then you should seriously consider
35411 using a bibliography database.
35414 \begin_layout Standard
35415 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
35416 we use two bibliographies in this document,
35421 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
35423 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
35425 the database approach relieves you,
35426 amongst other things,
35427 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
35430 \begin_layout Subsection
35431 The Bibliography Environment
35432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35434 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35447 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
35448 If you click on it,
35449 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
35458 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
35459 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
35460 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
35464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35469 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
35475 \begin_inset Newline newline
35479 \begin_inset Flex URL
35482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35484 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
35495 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35505 a short form of its title,
35507 \begin_inset Newline newline
35515 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
35520 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35528 \begin_layout Standard
35529 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
35531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35534 or the toolbar button
35537 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
35541 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
35542 Select one or more keys from the list and
35552 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
35553 If you click on the box,
35554 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35557 \begin_layout Standard
35558 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35559 Here are two examples;
35560 the first without a label,
35561 the second with the label
35562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35572 \begin_layout Standard
35576 Companion Second Edition
35580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35582 key "latexcompanion"
35590 \begin_layout Standard
35591 The \SpecialChar LyX
35592 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35606 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35612 \begin_inset Index idx
35617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35620 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35637 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35638 the label needs to be given the form
35639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35650 Author A and Author B(Year)
35651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35658 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35670 in the document settings
35671 \begin_inset Index idx
35676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35694 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35704 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35713 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35715 Once you have done that,
35719 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35721 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35724 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35743 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35744 the second the year (without parentheses).
35745 These two are madatory.
35746 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35752 ) and in abrreviated form (
35760 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35761 add the abbreviated form to
35765 and the full list to the optional
35773 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35774 If specified like this,
35777 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35778 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35798 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35802 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35803 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35804 In the bibliography entry,
35805 author and year must be added manually.
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35811 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35823 arg "layout-paragraph"
35827 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35830 \begin_layout Subsection
35831 Bibliography databases
35832 \begin_inset Index idx
35837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35856 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35863 \begin_layout Standard
35864 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35869 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35870 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35875 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35876 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35877 This database can be used for different documents,
35878 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35879 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35882 \begin_layout Standard
35883 The database is a text file with the file extension
35884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35896 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35897 The format is explained in
35898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35905 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35907 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35909 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35915 The file can be created using any text editor,
35916 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35917 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35919 \begin_inset Flex URL
35922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35924 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35932 \begin_layout Standard
35934 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35935 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35936 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35937 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35938 But it has its drawbacks,
35939 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35940 Those are addressed by
35945 \begin_inset Index idx
35950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35953 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35968 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35969 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35980 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35982 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35983 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35993 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
35996 \begin_layout Standard
35997 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36003 set in the document settings (menu
36005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36009 \begin_inset Index idx
36014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36016 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36042 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36051 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36053 \begin_inset Index idx
36058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36060 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36064 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36078 \begin_layout Standard
36079 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36084 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36086 \begin_inset space ~
36092 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36100 Add bibliography to TOC
36102 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
36107 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
36109 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
36114 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
36115 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
36120 \begin_layout Standard
36121 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36122 style file is a text file with the file extension
36123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36134 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
36135 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36136 distribution should provide several of these,
36137 and many publishers provide their own style files,
36138 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
36139 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
36140 but this is something for experts.
36144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36145 For information on how this is done,
36147 \begin_inset Newline newline
36151 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36153 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
36163 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36169 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
36172 \begin_layout Standard
36173 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
36176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36178 \begin_inset Index idx
36183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36200 \begin_inset Index idx
36205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36208 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36225 \begin_layout Standard
36226 Accessing a database via
36230 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36233 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
36235 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
36240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36241 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36243 \begin_inset space ~
36249 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36250 you cannot select a
36255 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
36259 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36262 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
36264 note the following.
36269 \begin_layout Standard
36274 has two different style files:
36275 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
36276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36287 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
36288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36299 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
36300 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
36301 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
36304 \begin_layout Standard
36309 styles are not set in the
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36318 but in the document settings.
36319 \begin_inset Index idx
36324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36326 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36341 in the dialog in the
36346 which is only visible if you use
36351 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
36352 These options are described in detail in the
36358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36368 \begin_layout Standard
36369 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
36370 \begin_inset space ~
36374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36376 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36388 Bibliography Processors
36391 \begin_layout Standard
36392 To generate the bibliography from a database,
36394 uses a bibliography processor,
36395 that is an external program that reads the database,
36396 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
36397 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36399 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
36400 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
36404 \begin_layout Standard
36406 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
36407 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
36408 You can do this on a general level in
36410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36411 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36412 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36415 or for individual documents in
36417 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36418 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36422 The following variants are available by default:
36425 \begin_layout Description
36428 \begin_inset Index idx
36433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36436 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36450 developed exclusively for
36454 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36460 provides full Unicode support,
36461 unlimited memory and many specific features
36471 it is strongly recommended to use
36478 \begin_layout Description
36479 bibtex the standard;
36480 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
36482 works with all bibliography packages,
36483 although it will probably fail with
36487 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
36490 \begin_layout Description
36491 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
36497 works with all bibliography packages,
36498 although more complex
36502 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
36507 features are supported.
36510 \begin_layout Standard
36511 By default (with the
36517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36518 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36531 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36532 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36533 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36538 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
36551 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36552 -based bibliography styles).
36553 This should suit most needs.
36556 \begin_layout Standard
36557 In Japanese documents,
36558 a specific processor is used.
36559 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36560 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36566 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36567 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36568 You can adjust it in
36570 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36571 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36572 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36578 \begin_layout Standard
36579 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36580 Before adding options,
36581 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36604 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36605 These are explained in detail in section
36607 Customizing Bibliographies
36611 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36616 Additional Features
36619 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36623 \begin_layout Subsection
36625 \begin_inset Index idx
36630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36632 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36649 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36656 \begin_layout Standard
36657 Many different citation formats are common,
36659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36663 \begin_inset space \space{}
36666 numerical citation (as
36667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36674 like in this document),
36675 alpha-numerical citations (as
36676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36683 ) or author-year citations (as
36684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36693 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36701 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36705 \begin_inset Index idx
36710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36726 you have a range of other options,
36727 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36732 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36752 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36755 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36764 With a bibliography database (see
36765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36767 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36775 ) one has in contrary to the
36779 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36780 These style formats are available:
36783 \begin_layout Description
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36788 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36789 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36792 \begin_layout Description
36793 Biblatex loads the package
36798 \begin_inset Index idx
36803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36806 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36820 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36822 Biblatex citation style
36826 Biblatex bibliography style
36829 Options to the package
36833 can be entered in the
36840 \begin_layout Description
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36846 \begin_inset space ~
36849 mode) loads the package
36853 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36854 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36865 behavior very closely.
36870 this option has some additional styles.
36875 styles are also supported by this variant.
36878 \begin_layout Description
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36883 (BibTeX) loads the package
36888 \begin_inset Index idx
36893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36896 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36910 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36913 \begin_layout Description
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36918 (BibTeX) loads the package
36923 \begin_inset Index idx
36928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36931 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36945 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36957 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36958 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36968 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36970 Whether the output uses numerical,
36971 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36973 Biblatex citation style
36977 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36978 a suitable style is proposed.
36985 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36990 multiple style variants are available in the
36995 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
36996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37011 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
37012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37016 \begin_inset space \space{}
37020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
37034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37038 \begin_inset space \space{}
37042 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
37043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37047 \begin_inset space \space{}
37051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37063 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37081 Here is a simple example where the text
37082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37093 appears after the reference:
37096 \begin_layout Quote
37098 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37101 key "latexcompanion"
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37110 All styles except for
37114 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
37115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37123 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
37124 if the style requires this.
37127 \begin_layout Standard
37128 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
37129 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
37130 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
37131 the postnote will follow the last.
37136 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
37137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37140 qualified citation lists
37141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37147 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
37151 dialog will display three columns in the field
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37182 If you double-click on an item's
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37199 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
37202 General text before
37208 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
37211 \begin_layout Subsection
37213 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
37214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37216 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
37220 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37226 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
37228 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37235 \begin_inset space ~
37239 \begin_inset space ~
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37246 Content\SpecialChar ldots
37249 context menu if specific conditions are met:
37252 \begin_layout Itemize
37254 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
37255 If citation entries include any of the fields
37256 \begin_inset Flex Code
37259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37261 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37270 \begin_inset Flex Code
37273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37275 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37283 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
37285 \begin_inset Flex Code
37288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37290 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37298 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
37303 \begin_inset Flex Code
37306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37308 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37317 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
37320 \begin_layout Itemize
37322 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37323 If citation entries include any of the fields
37324 \begin_inset Flex Code
37327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37338 \change_inserted 5863208 1692129620
37340 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37342 \begin_inset Flex Code
37345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37347 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37355 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
37356 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
37357 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
37360 \begin_layout Standard
37362 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37363 In addition to that,
37366 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37373 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37374 By default we provide python script
37375 \begin_inset Flex Code
37378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37380 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
37389 but you can use any modified script by setting
37390 \begin_inset Flex Code
37393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37395 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
37398 citation_search_view
37406 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
37408 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
37410 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37412 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
37417 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
37419 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37423 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37426 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
37427 The default setting is to be found in the file
37431 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
37439 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37440 your disk for matching files if you enable
37442 Search drive for cited files
37446 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37447 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
37448 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37449 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37453 It uses the tokens supplied at
37457 in the same preferences section (by default:
37459 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
37464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37466 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37468 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
37470 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
37472 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37474 \begin_inset Flex Code
37477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37479 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
37480 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
37489 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
37491 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
37493 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37512 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
37515 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37516 are automatically stripped from the result.
37517 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
37519 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37528 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37530 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
37531 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
37533 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
37535 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37536 of the file (at arbitrary position).
37538 opens the first matching file it finds.
37539 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
37540 the more systematic your file naming is,
37541 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
37542 the greater the chance this works for you.
37547 \begin_layout Standard
37549 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402434
37550 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
37551 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37553 \begin_inset Flex Code
37556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37558 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37567 \begin_inset Flex Code
37570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37572 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37581 but there are also special keys,
37582 which are documented in the
37584 Customization manual
37590 Cite format description
37595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37597 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402437
37598 Security implications
37601 \begin_layout Standard
37603 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402479
37604 Note that any document (or mainly
37605 \begin_inset Flex Code
37608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37610 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402454
37618 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
37621 \begin_layout Standard
37623 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402467
37624 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
37625 but beware what you are doing).
37630 \begin_layout Section
37632 \begin_inset Index idx
37637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37654 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37658 \begin_inset space ~
37663 or the toolbar button
37670 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37672 \begin_inset space ~
37676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37678 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37683 for some advanced methods)
37687 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37691 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37693 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37697 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37702 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37704 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37706 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37709 the text that appears in the index
37710 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37711 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37721 index inset in the heading above for example)
37724 The word where the cursor is in
37725 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37729 or the currently highlighted text
37730 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37734 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37736 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37740 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37746 copied into the inset)
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37753 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37754 (which prints out the index in your document)
37757 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37758 in the document with
37759 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37765 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37767 \begin_inset space ~
37773 A light blue box labeled
37774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37785 will show the place where the index
37786 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37788 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37792 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37797 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37800 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37802 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37805 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37807 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37809 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37811 as there are no settings to make.
37812 This changes if you select
37813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37816 Use multiple indexes
37817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37821 \begin_inset space ~
37825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37827 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37837 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37838 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37844 \begin_layout Standard
37846 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37848 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37850 you can customize index entries to look different.
37851 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37852 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37853 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37854 or additionally to,
37856 you can format the page reference (e.
37857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37861 make it bold for specific pages),
37862 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37863 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37877 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37884 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37885 give a short overview of
37886 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37890 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37891 these features in turn
37892 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37895 in the next subsections.
37896 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37897 's index mechanism,
37898 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37900 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37902 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37910 \begin_layout Subsection
37912 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37915 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37921 Grouping Index Entries
37922 \begin_inset Index idx
37927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37929 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 Index entries are often
37948 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37951 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37952 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37953 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37959 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37966 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37976 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37977 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37981 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37992 Maximally two such subentry insets,
37994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37998 three levels of grouping in total,
37999 are allowed per index entry.
38000 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
38001 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
38002 In the \SpecialChar LyX
38004 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
38009 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38018 \begin_layout Standard
38020 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
38022 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
38023 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
38024 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38025 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
38026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38034 First we create the entry
38035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38049 reference "subsec:Lists"
38055 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38062 reference "sec:Itemize"
38068 we insert the command
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38073 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38079 \begin_layout Standard
38081 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38087 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38093 \begin_layout Standard
38095 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38096 for the enumerated list in section
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38103 reference "sec:Enumerate"
38113 \begin_layout Standard
38115 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
38116 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38118 subentries are indicated by a preceding
38119 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
38123 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
38127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38135 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
38137 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38139 although you have to take care that the character is not
38142 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
38145 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38153 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38159 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
38160 marks the grouping levels.
38164 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
38165 You can have three levels;
38166 every index level is indented a bit more.
38167 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
38168 If we don't have an index entry for
38169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38177 it will be printed anyway,
38178 but without a page number.
38183 \begin_layout Subsection
38185 \begin_inset Index idx
38190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38192 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38211 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
38213 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
38217 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
38218 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
38219 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
38220 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
38224 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
38226 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
38230 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
38231 index more pages under the same entry
38232 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
38233 refer to a page range instead,
38234 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
38235 one that marks the beginning of the range,
38236 the other that marks its end
38240 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
38241 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
38242 To mark start and end,
38243 select the respective
38247 option in the index inset settings dialog.
38248 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
38249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38269 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
38270 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
38271 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
38272 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
38275 \begin_layout Standard
38277 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38279 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
38280 we create an index entry in section
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38287 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
38295 \begin_layout Standard
38297 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38300 Paragraph environments|(
38303 \begin_layout Standard
38305 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38306 and another entry at the end of section
38307 \begin_inset space ~
38311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38313 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
38321 \begin_layout Standard
38323 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38326 Paragraph environments|)
38329 \begin_layout Standard
38331 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38356 respectively start and end the index range.
38357 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
38358 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
38359 An example is the index entry
38360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38373 \begin_layout Subsection
38375 \begin_inset Index idx
38380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38382 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38399 \begin_layout Standard
38400 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
38401 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
38408 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
38409 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
38411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38423 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
38424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38436 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
38437 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38443 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
38450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38465 \begin_layout Standard
38467 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
38468 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
38471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38472 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 \begin_layout Standard
38480 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
38481 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
38484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38485 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38497 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
38498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38518 \begin_layout Standard
38520 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38521 We referred for example in the index entry
38522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38530 \begin_inset space ~
38534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38536 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
38541 ) to the index entry
38542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38549 in the same section using the entry
38552 \begin_layout Standard
38554 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38557 GIF|see{Image formats}
38560 \begin_layout Standard
38562 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38563 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
38565 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
38566 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
38571 \begin_layout Subsection
38573 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
38574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38576 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38583 \begin_inset Index idx
38588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38590 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38607 \begin_layout Standard
38609 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38610 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38611 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38616 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38619 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38620 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38621 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38622 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38623 or if you use macros
38626 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38630 \begin_layout Standard
38632 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38633 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38639 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38641 \begin_inset space ~
38645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38647 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38657 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38658 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38685 \begin_inset Index idx
38690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38692 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38707 \begin_inset Index idx
38712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38714 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38729 \begin_inset Index idx
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38743 maison but we want the order maïs,
38750 \begin_layout Standard
38752 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38755 previous entry@current entry
38758 \begin_layout Standard
38760 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38761 In our case we want to have
38762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38777 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38780 \begin_layout Standard
38782 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38788 \begin_layout Standard
38790 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38791 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38792 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38794 See the next subsection for an example.
38795 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38799 \begin_layout Standard
38801 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38802 To accommodate for that,
38805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38806 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38810 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38811 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38813 you can pass the sort key
38814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38825 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38828 \begin_layout Standard
38830 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38831 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38833 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38842 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38844 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38846 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38848 \begin_inset space ~
38852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38854 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38864 \begin_layout Subsection
38866 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38868 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38872 \begin_inset Index idx
38877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38896 \begin_layout Standard
38898 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38900 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38903 he appearance of index entries
38904 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38905 can be formatted as usual
38907 via the text style dialog
38908 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38910 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38911 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38914 \begin_inset Index idx
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38921 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 This is an italic dummy entry
38938 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38939 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38954 will be listed separately.
38956 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38958 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38962 \begin_layout Standard
38964 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38968 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38970 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38974 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38980 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38982 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38983 number using the character
38984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38991 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38992 -command without a backslash.
38993 We can write for example
38994 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
38995 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
39015 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
39022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39026 a self-defined command
39027 \begin_inset Flex Code
39030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
39040 or an existing macro such as
39041 \begin_inset Flex Code
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
39059 \begin_layout Standard
39061 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
39064 italic page number:|textit
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39069 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
39070 to get the page number in italic.
39071 \begin_inset Index idx
39076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39078 italic page number:|textit
39083 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
39084 -commands begin with a backslash,
39085 but in this special case
39086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39108 Have a look at section
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39115 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39120 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39126 \begin_layout Standard
39128 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
39129 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39138 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
39142 to generate the index,
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39150 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39161 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
39166 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
39168 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39171 key "latexcompanion"
39186 \begin_layout Standard
39188 we encourage you to
39189 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
39190 not format page numbers directly as shown above
39191 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
39192 use self-defined commands
39196 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
39197 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
39198 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
39200 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
39202 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
39203 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
39204 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
39207 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
39211 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
39212 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
39213 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
39214 definition of the indexed term,
39215 so that users can easily find definitions.
39217 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
39221 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
39224 the following in the preamble
39227 \begin_layout Standard
39233 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
39235 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
39241 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
39249 \begin_layout Standard
39251 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
39253 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
39254 add the custom formatting
39255 \begin_inset Flex Code
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
39268 to the respective entry settings dialog.
39273 \begin_layout Standard
39275 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
39281 \begin_layout Standard
39283 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
39284 in the index entry.
39285 \begin_inset Index idx
39290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39297 The advantage is that,
39299 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
39300 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
39303 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
39304 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
39305 not every single index entry.
39306 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
39310 \begin_layout Standard
39312 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
39313 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39318 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
39324 If you use the index processor
39330 makeindex or xindex
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39339 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39345 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
39350 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
39351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39358 (style file) you use before they can be used.
39360 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
39363 \begin_layout Verbatim
39365 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
39367 (markup-locref :open "
39369 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
39372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
39376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39379 key "latexcompanion"
39394 \begin_layout Standard
39395 You can also change the layout
39396 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
39398 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
39404 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
39406 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
39410 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
39414 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
39418 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
39421 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
39424 get a bold font for all index entries.
39426 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
39429 it is better (and required for
39430 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
39433 more advanced tasks
39434 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
39438 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
39441 to set up a so-called
39444 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
39468 ) to determine the formatting;
39469 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
39474 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
39476 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
39482 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
39489 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
39497 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
39505 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
39510 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
39512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39514 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
39520 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
39522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39524 key "makeindex,xindy"
39533 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
39534 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39535 packages available that ease such formatting,
39537 \begin_inset Flex URL
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39542 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
39544 https://ctan.org/topic/index
39554 \begin_layout Subsection
39556 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
39557 Special Characters in Index Entries
39558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39560 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
39567 \begin_layout Standard
39569 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
39570 As already mentioned above,
39571 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
39574 \begin_inset Flex Code
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
39589 \begin_inset Flex Code
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39604 \begin_inset Flex Code
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39610 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39622 \begin_inset Flex Code
39625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39627 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39636 If you use them literally,
39637 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39639 you will not get the character itself.
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39644 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39645 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39647 \begin_inset Quotes els
39651 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39655 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39657 the escape character is
39658 \begin_inset Flex Code
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39664 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39674 (but this can be changed).
39676 \begin_inset Flex Code
39679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39681 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39682 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39694 \begin_inset Flex Code
39697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39700 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39712 \begin_inset Flex Code
39715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39717 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39718 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39722 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39734 \begin_inset Flex Code
39737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39740 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39750 to get the special character you want.
39751 Note that the escape character,
39753 \begin_inset Flex Code
39756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39758 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39759 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39774 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39781 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39791 \begin_layout Subsection
39793 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39796 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39800 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39803 \begin_layout Standard
39805 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39806 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39807 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39808 This is not only time-consuming,
39809 but also error-prone;
39811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39815 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39817 provides some functions to ease the task.
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39822 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39824 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39825 you can open the outliner via
39827 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39837 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39847 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39848 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39853 it will be more easier),
39858 -click on the entry and select
39860 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39862 from the context menu.
39863 This will do just what it says:
39864 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39869 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39872 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39873 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39874 you can select from the context menu
39876 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39879 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39880 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39881 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39882 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39886 is the word before the index entry,
39891 will be considered as well,
39897 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39899 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39900 but only relevant occurrences!
39901 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39902 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39904 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39907 \begin_layout Subsection
39909 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39911 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39915 \begin_inset Index idx
39920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39922 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39939 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39946 \begin_layout Standard
39948 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39950 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39957 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39966 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39974 for index generation;
39975 otherwise the program
39980 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39983 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
39996 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39997 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39998 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
39999 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
40001 if you are writing in another than the English language,
40016 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
40017 As a further option,
40018 you can select the rather new
40025 \begin_layout Itemize
40027 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
40033 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
40034 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
40035 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40043 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
40049 how to manually fix this sorting,
40050 but this is very tedious work).
40053 \begin_layout Itemize
40055 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
40056 The alternative program,
40062 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
40063 It can sort most languages correctly,
40064 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
40070 is no longer actively maintained,
40071 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
40077 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
40078 But if you have it available,
40079 it is almost always a better option than
40086 \begin_layout Itemize
40088 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
40095 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
40096 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
40097 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
40098 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
40100 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
40101 The program is still in development,
40102 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
40103 But the program is definitely worth a try,
40108 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40115 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
40117 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
40121 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
40123 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
40126 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
40127 's preferences dialog,
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40135 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
40141 The available options are listed and explained in
40142 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
40144 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40146 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
40152 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
40154 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40156 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
40166 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
40168 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
40172 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
40174 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
40177 alternative program
40178 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
40181 to generate the index.
40184 \begin_layout Standard
40185 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
40186 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
40189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40194 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
40197 \begin_layout Subsection
40199 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
40200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40202 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
40211 \begin_layout Standard
40212 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
40214 you might need to set up a separate
40215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40222 next to the standard index.
40224 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
40225 but there are packages that add this feature.
40232 \begin_inset Index idx
40237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40240 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40254 package to generate multiple indexes.
40255 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40261 If yours does not ship it,
40262 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
40265 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40273 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40275 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
40276 Please consult the package's manual for details.
40284 \begin_layout Standard
40285 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
40286 for the use of multiple indexes,
40289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40290 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40293 and select the option
40295 Use multiple Indexes
40302 already contains the standard index
40303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40311 To add further indexes,
40312 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
40316 input field and press the
40321 The new index now also appears in the list.
40323 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
40324 label color to the new index.
40327 \begin_layout Standard
40328 Once the document changes have been applied,
40329 you can find the new index list in
40331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40332 List/Contents/References
40338 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
40339 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
40340 but there are additional features:
40343 \begin_layout Itemize
40344 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
40345 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
40348 \begin_layout Itemize
40349 By right-clicking on an index,
40350 you can change its type.
40352 you can specify an index to be a
40358 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
40360 if you use a book class,
40361 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
40362 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
40365 \begin_layout Itemize
40370 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
40371 code in the name of the index.
40374 \begin_layout Section
40375 Nomenclature/Glossary
40376 \begin_inset Index idx
40381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 \begin_inset Index idx
40393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40395 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
40398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40412 name "sec:Nomenclature"
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40420 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
40423 \begin_layout Standard
40424 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
40425 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40431 \begin_inset Index idx
40436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40439 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40454 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40457 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40464 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40468 \begin_layout Standard
40469 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
40471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40482 or the toolbar button
40485 arg "nomencl-insert"
40490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40501 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
40504 \begin_layout Standard
40505 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
40506 The first is the term or
40510 that you wish to define.
40515 of the term or symbol.
40518 \begin_layout Standard
40519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40528 To use \SpecialChar TeX
40529 code for nomenclature entries the option
40533 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
40541 \begin_layout Subsection
40542 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
40543 \begin_inset Index idx
40548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 If you have symbols in formulas,
40569 you have to define them in the
40573 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40580 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40589 \begin_inset Newline newline
40597 \begin_inset Newline newline
40603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40610 character starts/ends the formula.
40611 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40612 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40623 For capital Greek letters,
40624 start the command also with a capital letter,
40634 \begin_layout Standard
40635 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40636 syntax is given in section
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40643 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40651 \begin_layout Standard
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40660 dialog to format the description text;
40661 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40663 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40668 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40675 in this document is:
40676 \begin_inset Newline newline
40681 dummy entry for the character
40686 \begin_inset Newline newline
40698 \begin_inset space ~
40708 font use the command
40739 \begin_layout Standard
40740 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40745 \begin_inset space \space{}
40749 \begin_inset Newline newline
40765 \begin_inset Newline newline
40768 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40769 This command will make the font of all symbols
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_layout Standard
40785 If the characters |
40786 \begin_inset space \space{}
40790 \begin_inset space \space{}
40794 \begin_inset space \space{}
40799 \begin_inset space \space{}
40803 \begin_inset space \space{}
40806 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40807 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40808 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40810 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40813 character in front of them.
40814 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40816 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40817 LatexCommand nomenclature
40818 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40819 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40825 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40827 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40828 LatexCommand nomenclature
40829 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40830 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40840 \begin_layout Subsection
40841 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40842 \begin_inset Index idx
40847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40867 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40868 -code of the symbol definition.
40869 This leads to undesired results when you,
40871 have symbols in formulas.
40872 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40875 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40876 LatexCommand nomenclature
40878 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40886 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40890 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40891 LatexCommand nomenclature
40894 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40900 They will be sorted by
40901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40927 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40930 will be sorted before the
40934 since the character
40935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40942 is considered in sorting.
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 To control the sort order,
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40955 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40956 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40957 For the example given,
40962 in this field for the
40963 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40971 will be located before
40972 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40978 \begin_layout Standard
40979 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40985 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40995 \begin_layout Subsection
40996 Nomenclature Options
40997 \begin_inset Index idx
41002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41021 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
41028 \begin_layout Standard
41033 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
41034 Here are some of its options;
41035 for more have a look at its documentation:
41038 \begin_layout Description
41039 refeq Appends the phrase
41040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41056 to every nomenclature entry,
41063 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
41066 \begin_layout Description
41067 refpage Appends the phrase
41068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41084 to every nomenclature entry,
41091 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
41094 \begin_layout Description
41095 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
41098 \begin_layout Standard
41099 To use one or more of the options,
41100 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
41102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41106 In this document the options
41114 \begin_layout Standard
41115 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41121 \begin_layout Standard
41122 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
41126 field in the nomenclature dialog:
41129 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_layout Description
41142 nomrefpage Like the
41149 \begin_layout Description
41152 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
41161 \begin_layout Description
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41176 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
41179 \begin_layout Standard
41181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41188 are automatically translated for most document languages.
41190 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
41194 \begin_layout Standard
41203 \begin_inset Newline newline
41209 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41229 \begin_inset Newline newline
41236 pagedeclaration}[1]{
41237 \begin_inset Newline newline
41243 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_layout Standard
41266 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
41267 assure that you use
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41275 in the document settings under
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_layout Standard
41294 \begin_inset Newline newline
41298 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41315 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
41317 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
41318 \begin_inset Newline newline
41325 pagedeclaration}[1]{
41326 \begin_inset Newline newline
41330 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41347 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
41352 \begin_layout Subsection
41353 Printing the Nomenclature
41354 \begin_inset Index idx
41359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41361 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41378 \begin_layout Standard
41379 To print the nomenclature,
41382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41383 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
41388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41399 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
41400 By right-clicking on it,
41401 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
41402 You can choose between these settings:
41405 \begin_layout Description
41406 Default a space of 1
41407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41413 \begin_layout Description
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41422 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
41425 \begin_layout Description
41426 Custom custom space
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
41431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41439 If you are not happy with the name,
41440 you can change it by redefining the command
41448 in order to change the name to
41453 add the following line to the preamble:
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41469 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
41472 \begin_layout Standard
41473 When you are using another document language than English,
41475 \begin_inset Newline newline
41491 where *** is the name of the language used.
41494 \begin_layout Subsection
41495 Nomenclature Program
41496 \begin_inset Index idx
41501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41503 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41520 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
41527 \begin_layout Standard
41534 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
41536 to generate the nomenclature.
41538 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41550 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
41556 The available options are listed and explained in
41557 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41559 key "nomencl,makeindex"
41567 \begin_layout Section
41569 \begin_inset Index idx
41574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41581 \begin_inset Index idx
41586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41588 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41605 name "sec:Branches"
41612 \begin_layout Standard
41613 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41614 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41615 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41620 allows you to put text into branches.
41621 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41622 To create a branch,
41623 either select the menu
41625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41626 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41629 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41639 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41640 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41641 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41642 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41644 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41657 \begin_inset space ~
41660 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41661 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41664 \begin_layout Standard
41665 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41666 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41671 where you can choose a branch.
41672 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41675 \begin_layout Standard
41676 Here is an example,
41677 where only the question text appears,
41678 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41681 \begin_layout Standard
41682 \begin_inset Branch Question
41686 \begin_layout Standard
41692 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41700 \begin_layout Standard
41701 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41711 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41719 \begin_layout Standard
41726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41727 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41731 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41732 Consider for example a file
41733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41740 which has the above branches.
41742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41750 the PDF export file would be called
41751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41774 branch were inactive,
41776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41813 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41817 if both branches were active.
41818 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41819 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41825 \begin_layout Standard
41827 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41828 It is also possible to
41829 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41833 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41835 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41839 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41844 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41845 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41849 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41851 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41854 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41855 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41856 right-click on the inset button and choose
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_layout Standard
41868 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41872 \begin_layout Standard
41879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41886 branch is deactivated.
41892 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41898 \begin_layout Standard
41899 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41900 like inside equations,
41901 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41902 definitions for each branch.
41903 For example you can define for the question branch
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41908 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41917 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41930 \begin_layout Standard
41940 \begin_layout Standard
41950 \begin_layout Standard
41951 and for the answer branch
41954 \begin_layout Standard
41964 \begin_layout Standard
41974 \begin_layout Standard
41975 \begin_inset Branch Question
41979 \begin_layout Standard
41983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 \begin_layout Standard
42012 \begin_inset Branch Answer
42016 \begin_layout Standard
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42048 \begin_layout Standard
42049 Now it is possible to use the
42053 question{\SpecialChar ldots
42060 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
42063 commands to obtain conditional output.
42064 Here is an example formula where only the
42071 \begin_inset Formula
42073 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
42081 \begin_layout Standard
42083 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
42091 \begin_layout Standard
42092 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
42093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42097 \begin_inset space \space{}
42100 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
42102 For this advanced usage,
42110 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42113 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
42117 \begin_layout Standard
42119 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42121 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813809
42123 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813809
42125 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42127 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813823
42129 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813823
42131 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42133 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813812
42135 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42137 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813845
42138 to keep all branches of a given name in
42139 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42141 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813847
42143 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42145 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813855
42147 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813873
42148 activation branch status with
42149 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42151 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813886
42154 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813893
42155 of all branch insets in the document we provide
42156 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813893
42159 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42163 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813903
42168 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813949
42169 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
42170 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813904
42173 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42175 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813911
42177 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813959
42179 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42181 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813962
42183 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42184 keyboard shortcut or add
42185 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813966
42187 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813966
42189 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42191 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813971
42193 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42194 user-defined context menu
42195 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813975
42197 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813976
42199 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42201 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813978
42203 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42209 \begin_layout Section
42211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42213 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
42218 \begin_inset Index idx
42223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42232 \begin_layout Standard
42234 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
42239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42244 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
42247 allows you to set up
42248 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
42250 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
42254 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
42256 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
42260 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
42264 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
42269 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
42271 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
42275 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
42277 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
42280 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42282 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
42284 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
42292 \begin_inset Index idx
42297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42300 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42315 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
42316 which you need to enable by clicking
42318 Use Hyperref Support
42320 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
42321 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
42323 Customize Hyperref Options
42326 Among other things,
42328 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
42332 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
42334 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
42338 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
42342 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
42345 cross-references in the
42346 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
42350 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
42352 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
42356 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
42357 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
42361 table of contents entry or on a reference to
42362 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
42363 open a website or to
42365 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
42367 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
42369 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
42370 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
42375 \begin_layout Standard
42376 The header information in the dialog tab
42380 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
42381 Many programs are able to extract this information,
42384 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
42387 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
42388 This is very useful to sort,
42389 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42404 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
42407 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
42410 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42422 \begin_inset space ~
42427 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
42428 which is useful for presentations.
42431 \begin_layout Standard
42433 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
42435 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
42443 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
42444 you can customize the
42445 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
42447 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
42451 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
42453 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
42457 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
42459 and you can specify
42462 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
42464 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
42465 will look and if links for
42467 bibliographical backreferences are created
42468 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
42474 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
42475 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42489 \begin_inset space ~
42494 option allows long links to be split;
42498 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_inset space ~
42506 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42519 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42528 colors the different links.
42529 The default colors are:
42532 \begin_layout Labeling
42533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42538 for hyperlinks and URLs
42541 \begin_layout Labeling
42542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42550 \begin_layout Labeling
42551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42559 \begin_layout Standard
42560 but you can change these in the
42561 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
42563 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
42569 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
42571 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
42578 in this document they were changed with the
42579 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
42583 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
42593 \begin_layout Quote
42602 \begin_layout Standard
42604 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
42610 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
42612 depending on the option selected,
42613 the number of the section,
42614 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42624 you can specify if PDF
42625 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
42627 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
42631 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
42632 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
42634 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
42635 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
42637 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
42639 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
42643 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
42649 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
42651 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
42653 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
42656 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
42664 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
42665 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
42666 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
42667 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
42671 \begin_inset space ~
42674 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42679 1 will only display the sections
42680 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42681 (collapsing the rest)
42684 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42688 \begin_layout Standard
42690 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42695 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42703 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42704 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42705 \begin_inset Flex Code
42708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42710 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42721 not via the package options.
42722 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42723 If you need to use one of those options,
42724 you can set them by adding
42727 \begin_layout Quote
42729 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42732 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42733 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42735 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42743 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42746 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42747 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42750 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42755 \begin_layout Standard
42757 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42762 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42764 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42765 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42766 input is simply ignored).
42767 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42773 At the point of writing this,
42774 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42776 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42779 but it is expected that in the future,
42780 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42783 \begin_layout Standard
42785 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42786 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42787 When you look in its document settings,
42788 you can see that some additional
42793 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42794 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42806 \begin_layout Section
42808 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42812 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42819 \begin_layout Subsection
42822 \begin_inset Index idx
42827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42837 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42844 \begin_layout Standard
42845 As \SpecialChar LyX
42846 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42848 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42849 commands and constructs,
42852 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42853 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42854 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42855 -package for every problem,
42856 though \SpecialChar LyX
42857 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42860 \begin_layout Standard
42862 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42863 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42864 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42867 Code box is created by the menu
42869 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42871 \begin_inset space ~
42876 or by the toolbar button
42889 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42899 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42902 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42907 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42912 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42920 you can write the command part
42926 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42927 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42931 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42932 Code box behind the word.
42933 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42934 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42937 \begin_layout Standard
42938 \begin_inset Graphics
42939 filename clipart/ERT.png
42947 \begin_layout Standard
42951 \begin_layout Standard
42952 This is a line with a
42956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42979 \begin_layout Standard
42980 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42990 -commands without parameters,
42991 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42992 know that the command is finished.
43000 \begin_layout Subsection
43001 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43003 \begin_inset Argument 1
43006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43007 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
43014 \begin_inset Index idx
43019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43029 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43036 \begin_layout Standard
43037 When you write larger documents or books,
43038 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43039 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
43040 uses in the background.
43041 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
43042 is based on commands,
43044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43052 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
43054 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
43055 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
43056 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
43057 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43061 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
43063 As mentioned above,
43064 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43066 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43079 \begin_layout Standard
43080 As result you find that the package
43085 \begin_inset Index idx
43090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43093 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
43111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43114 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43126 \begin_layout Standard
43131 usepackage[options]{package name}
43134 \begin_layout Standard
43135 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
43136 commands begin with a backslash,
43137 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
43138 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43142 In your case the package name is
43147 After a look in the documentation of the package,
43148 you know that the option
43152 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
43153 So you add the command
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43161 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
43164 \begin_layout Standard
43165 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
43169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43170 For more commands provided by the
43175 have a look at its documentation,
43177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43193 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
43194 For example if you use a
43199 you don't need the package
43204 you can instead write
43207 \begin_layout Standard
43212 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43218 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
43219 So if you plan to write a large document,
43220 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
43227 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
43230 \begin_layout Standard
43231 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
43232 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
43233 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43235 use the \SpecialChar TeX
43236 Code box as described in the previous section.
43239 \begin_layout Standard
43240 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
43242 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43244 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43246 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
43254 \begin_layout Standard
43255 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43275 \begin_inset Note Note
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43279 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
43287 \begin_layout Left Header
43288 \begin_inset Argument 1
43291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43311 \begin_inset Note Note
43314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 defines the header line as described below
43323 \begin_layout Center Header
43324 \begin_inset Argument 1
43327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43336 \begin_layout Right Header
43337 \begin_inset Argument 1
43340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 \begin_layout Left Footer
43362 \begin_inset Argument 1
43365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43386 \begin_layout Center Footer
43387 \begin_inset Argument 1
43390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43402 \begin_inset Newline newline
43406 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43412 \begin_layout Right Footer
43413 \begin_inset Argument 1
43416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43438 \begin_layout Section
43439 Customized Page Headers and Footers
43440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43442 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
43447 \begin_inset Index idx
43452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43469 \begin_inset Index idx
43474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43483 \begin_layout Standard
43484 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
43485 you need to set the
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43499 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43511 As a second step add in the menu
43513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43523 Custom Header/Footerlines
43526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43530 This module offers the following 6
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43537 \begin_layout Description
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43551 \begin_inset space ~
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43561 \begin_layout Description
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43571 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_layout Standard
43586 for the different positions in the header/footer.
43587 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
43590 \begin_layout Standard
43592 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
43593 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
43595 \begin_inset space ~
43599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43601 reference "fig:Page-layout"
43606 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 \begin_inset Float figure
43617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43620 \begin_inset Tabular
43621 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
43622 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
43623 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43624 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43625 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43656 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43674 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43685 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43689 The normal text on the page goes here.
43690 The running header is above the text,
43691 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43692 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43693 title of the chapter,
43694 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43700 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43738 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43767 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43785 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43790 name "fig:Page-layout"
43794 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43807 \begin_layout Standard
43808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43817 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43820 \begin_inset space ~
43825 is set to “Default”.
43826 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43834 \begin_layout Subsection
43838 \begin_layout Standard
43839 To define your header line,
43840 add all three header environments.
43841 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43842 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43843 For single-sided documents,
43844 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43845 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43846 nothing appears in the output.
43847 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43850 \begin_layout Standard
43851 For the definition,
43852 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43853 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43866 \begin_layout Description
43869 thepage prints the current page number
43872 \begin_layout Description
43875 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43878 \begin_layout Description
43881 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43884 \begin_layout Description
43887 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43888 If the document has chapters,
43889 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43895 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43898 because it usually goes in a left header.
43901 \begin_layout Description
43904 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43905 If the document has chapters,
43906 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43907 It is normally used in the right header.
43910 \begin_layout Subsection
43911 Default header/footer
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43916 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43917 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43918 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43919 but leave it blank.
43921 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43933 \begin_layout Subsection
43937 \begin_layout Standard
43938 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43939 Some pages are different.
43940 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43941 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43942 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43943 but that is normal.
43944 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43948 Header and footer decoration line
43951 \begin_layout Standard
43954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43957 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43958 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43970 in the following way:
43973 \begin_layout Standard
43980 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43983 \begin_layout Standard
43984 where thickness is a size in standard units like
43997 If you don't want a line,
43998 set the thickness to 0
43999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44005 \begin_layout Standard
44006 The lines can also be colored,
44007 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44009 If you really need this,
44010 have a look at the Internet or in section
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44026 Several header/footer lines
44029 \begin_layout Standard
44030 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
44031 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
44033 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
44034 To expand the height,
44035 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44051 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_layout Standard
44068 headheight}{height}
44071 \begin_layout Standard
44076 is a size in standard units (e.
44077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44081 \begin_inset space \space{}
44089 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
44090 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
44091 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44092 logfile with the menu
44094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44109 to see if you can find a warning about the package
44114 \begin_inset Index idx
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44122 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 If there is such a warning,
44138 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
44141 \begin_layout Subsection
44145 \begin_layout Standard
44146 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
44147 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
44148 This example consists of the following definition:
44151 \begin_layout Description
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44163 empty optional argument
44166 \begin_layout Description
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44172 empty optional argument
44175 \begin_layout Description
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44187 in the optional argument
44190 \begin_layout Description
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44202 in the optional argument
44205 \begin_layout Description
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44225 \begin_inset Newline newline
44229 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
44233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44236 in the optional argument
44239 \begin_layout Description
44241 \begin_inset space ~
44251 empty optional argument
44254 \begin_layout Description
44257 headrulewidth set to 2
44258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44264 \begin_layout Standard
44265 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
44267 For more specialized features,
44270 see the manual of the
44276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44286 \begin_layout Standard
44287 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
44293 \begin_layout Standard
44297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44301 pagestyle{headings}
44307 \begin_inset Note Note
44310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44311 switches back to page style with the default headings
44319 \begin_layout Section
44320 Previewing Snippets of your Document
44321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44323 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44328 \begin_inset Index idx
44333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44340 \begin_inset Index idx
44345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 \begin_layout Standard
44366 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
44369 \begin_layout Subsection
44373 \begin_layout Standard
44374 To get previews working,
44375 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44381 \begin_inset Index idx
44386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44389 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44403 (on some systems named simply
44408 If it is not already installed,
44409 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
44412 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44419 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44421 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
44430 for \SpecialChar LyX
44431 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44432 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
44436 \begin_layout Subsection
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44441 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44442 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44444 activate the option
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44467 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
44474 \begin_inset space ~
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44492 is the multiplication factor for the size.
44495 \begin_layout Standard
44496 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44517 \begin_layout Standard
44518 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
44519 and when you finish editing an inset.
44522 \begin_layout Standard
44523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44541 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
44549 \begin_layout Subsection
44550 Selected document parts
44553 \begin_layout Standard
44554 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
44555 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
44556 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44559 insert a preview inset via the menu
44561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44565 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
44566 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
44567 If you click on the preview,
44568 you can edit the previewed stuff.
44571 \begin_layout Standard
44573 To create rotated boxes,
44574 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44581 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44593 is explained in section
44595 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
44600 \begin_inset space ~
44610 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
44611 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44612 the final rotated boxes,
44613 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
44614 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
44615 Here is the result:
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 \begin_inset Preview
44621 \begin_layout Standard
44626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44630 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
44636 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
44646 height_special "totalheight"
44651 backgroundcolor "none"
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44685 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44707 \begin_layout Standard
44708 Previewing works also for colors.
44709 In this example a special framed,
44710 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44728 is explained in section
44735 \begin_inset space ~
44748 \begin_layout Standard
44749 \begin_inset Preview
44751 \begin_layout Standard
44755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44779 This is text within a colored,
44784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 \begin_layout Standard
44800 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44806 \begin_layout Standard
44807 If \SpecialChar LyX
44808 does not show a preview,
44809 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44810 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44811 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44813 If \SpecialChar LyX
44814 cannot create a preview,
44815 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44817 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44818 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44819 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44822 \begin_layout Subsection
44827 \begin_layout Standard
44828 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44829 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44832 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44839 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44841 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44842 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44844 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44845 To view the whole document as source,
44846 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44852 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44854 but note that if you have several documents open,
44855 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44857 not just the one which is open at the time.
44860 \begin_layout Section
44861 Advanced Find and Replace
44862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44864 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44869 \begin_inset Index idx
44874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 \begin_inset Index idx
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 \begin_layout Subsection
44899 \begin_layout Standard
44900 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44901 allows for searching of complex,
44902 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44904 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44905 The key-features are:
44908 \begin_layout Itemize
44909 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44910 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44911 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44912 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44915 \begin_layout Itemize
44916 Search may be format-insensitive,
44917 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44920 and even mathematics),
44921 or it may be format-sensitive,
44924 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44927 \begin_layout Itemize
44928 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44929 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44932 \begin_layout Itemize
44933 Search may be widened to a specific
44939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44946 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44947 all the open files,
44948 or all the manuals available from the
44955 \begin_layout Itemize
44956 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44957 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44967 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44970 \begin_layout Subsection
44974 \begin_layout Standard
44975 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44977 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44990 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44993 ) or the toolbar button
44996 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45002 Advanced Find and Replace
45007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45011 \begin_layout Standard
45017 mini-editor a simple word,
45018 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
45021 \begin_inset space ~
45026 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
45029 arg "paragraph-break"
45033 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
45035 bold or normal face,
45036 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
45040 arg "paragraph-break"
45043 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
45047 searches backwards.
45050 \begin_layout Standard
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45059 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45072 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
45075 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45076 Searching for mathematics
45079 \begin_layout Standard
45080 Mathematical formulas,
45082 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
45085 or something more complex like
45086 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
45090 may be searched for by typing them in the
45095 When searching for a formula,
45096 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
45097 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
45098 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
45104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45108 \begin_layout Standard
45109 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
45110 This is done by switching to the
45114 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
45127 \begin_layout Itemize
45128 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
45131 \begin_layout Itemize
45132 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
45133 and within the same text style only.
45136 \begin_layout Itemize
45137 a normal word in a section heading,
45138 and searching for it,
45139 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
45141 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
45142 in addition to a section style,
45143 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
45146 \begin_layout Itemize
45147 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
45150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45154 \begin_layout Standard
45155 The entries made in the
45159 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45168 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
45173 button or alternatively press
45176 arg "paragraph-break"
45183 while the cursor is in the
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45194 \begin_layout Standard
45195 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
45197 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
45200 \begin_layout Itemize
45201 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
45202 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
45203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45210 with its typewriter version
45211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45225 \begin_layout Itemize
45226 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
45227 for example replacing occurrences of
45228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45232 \begin_inset Formula $R$
45236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45244 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
45248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45251 (you may want to enable the
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45267 options and disable the
45276 in order to avoid replacing all
45277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45284 letters occurring in normal text),
45286 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
45290 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
45295 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
45299 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
45305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45309 \begin_layout Standard
45310 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
45314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45315 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
45317 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45319 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
45329 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
45334 This is done with the context menu
45336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45337 Insert Regular Expression
45339 while the cursor is in the
45344 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
45348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
45352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45356 \begin_inset space ~
45359 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
45361 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
45367 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
45368 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
45369 Examples of using such a feature may be:
45372 \begin_layout Enumerate
45373 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
45379 editor the fraction
45380 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
45384 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45387 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
45390 \begin_layout Enumerate
45391 Searching for all text with a given style:
45394 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
45398 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814407
45402 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
45403 Adhere to search string formatting of
45404 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814409
45406 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
45412 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45414 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814412
45416 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45420 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814414
45424 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45426 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814534
45428 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814534
45432 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814548
45438 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814554
45439 in this section pressed
45445 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45450 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
45451 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
45454 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45457 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
45458 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
45460 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
45461 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
45465 \begin_layout Description
45467 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45468 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
45469 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814961
45471 as with the other options,
45472 the setting of the search string)
45473 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45477 \begin_layout Description
45479 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45484 color colored text like cyan,
45489 \begin_layout Description
45491 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_layout Description
45503 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
45505 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_layout Description
45514 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45525 \begin_layout Description
45527 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
45529 \begin_inset space ~
45538 \begin_layout Description
45540 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
45541 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
45546 \begin_layout Description
45548 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
45555 \begin_layout Description
45557 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
45558 Strike-through Single,
45562 \begin_layout Description
45564 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
45565 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
45568 \begin_layout Description
45570 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
45572 \begin_inset space ~
45585 \begin_layout Standard
45587 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
45588 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
45589 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45593 and referring back to them through
45594 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45599 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
45605 try searching with the regexp
45606 \begin_inset Newline newline
45610 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
45622 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
45623 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
45628 \begin_inset Newline newline
45631 in order to find word repetitions,
45635 \begin_layout Standard
45636 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
45637 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
45643 \begin_layout Standard
45644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45653 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
45654 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
45655 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
45657 \begin_inset space ~
45661 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45664 always refers to the first occurrence of
45665 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45668 in all entered regexps.
45676 \begin_layout Section
45678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45680 name "sec:Spellchecking"
45685 \begin_inset Index idx
45690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45699 \begin_layout Standard
45701 has a built-in spell checker.
45704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45712 key or the toolbar button
45715 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45718 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45719 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45720 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45721 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45722 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45723 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45724 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45725 if any could be found.
45726 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45731 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45732 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45735 \begin_layout Standard
45737 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45743 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45745 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45746 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45749 \begin_inset space ~
45757 arg "dialog-show character"
45760 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45762 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45766 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45767 can be downloaded from here:
45768 \begin_inset Newline newline
45772 \begin_inset Flex URL
45775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45777 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45779 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45780 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45781 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45789 \begin_inset Newline newline
45793 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45795 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45796 You should download
45799 \begin_inset space ~
45802 files for each language
45803 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45808 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45811 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45813 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45817 \begin_inset space ~
45820 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45821 's installation subfolder
45829 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45831 \begin_inset Newline newline
45834 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45835 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45836 but in most cases these are
45856 is the language code.
45859 \begin_layout Subsection
45863 \begin_layout Standard
45866 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45867 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45869 \begin_inset space ~
45872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45875 you can set the following things:
45878 \begin_layout Description
45880 \begin_inset space ~
45883 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45884 should use for spell checking.
45885 Depending on your platform,
45896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45898 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45913 \begin_inset space ~
45916 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45919 \begin_layout Description
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45924 language If this field is not empty,
45926 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45927 no matter what the document language is.
45930 \begin_layout Description
45932 \begin_inset space ~
45935 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45941 \begin_inset space \space{}
45945 This should normally not be needed.
45948 \begin_layout Description
45950 \begin_inset space ~
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45957 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45968 \begin_layout Description
45970 \begin_inset space ~
45973 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45974 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45975 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45976 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45977 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45980 \begin_layout Description
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45993 comments If enabled,
45994 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
45997 \begin_layout Section
45999 \begin_inset Index idx
46004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46013 name "sec:Thesaurus"
46020 \begin_layout Standard
46022 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
46023 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
46024 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
46032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46033 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46035 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
46046 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
46050 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
46051 which are available for many languages.
46054 \begin_layout Standard
46055 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
46059 \begin_layout Subsection
46060 Setting up the thesaurus
46063 \begin_layout Standard
46072 thesauri consist of two files per language:
46073 A file with the suffix
46077 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
46082 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
46083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46096 the US English files are named:
46099 \begin_layout Itemize
46103 \begin_layout Itemize
46107 \begin_layout Standard
46116 and its thesaurus installed,
46117 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
46120 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46121 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46122 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46124 \begin_inset space ~
46129 ) to the path where they are installed.
46133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46135 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
46136 typical locations are
46143 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
46148 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
46153 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
46157 dictionaries are to be found at
46163 LibreOffice-<Version>
46171 the default location is
46173 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
46174 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
46175 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
46176 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
46177 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
46178 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
46187 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
46188 installation process,
46189 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
46192 \begin_layout Standard
46193 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
46195 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
46197 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
46200 thesaurus dictionaries,
46201 you can download them from here:
46202 \begin_inset Newline newline
46206 \begin_inset Flex URL
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46211 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
46213 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
46214 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
46215 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
46225 \begin_layout Standard
46226 To install a new dictionary,
46227 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
46229 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46230 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46231 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46233 \begin_inset space ~
46238 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
46240 If this path is not defined yet,
46241 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
46245 \begin_layout Standard
46247 you can also install new dictionaries via
46249 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
46254 via your package manager (look for
46260 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
46264 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
46265 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
46267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46274 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46275 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46282 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
46285 \begin_layout Subsection
46286 Using the thesaurus
46289 \begin_layout Standard
46290 To start the thesaurus,
46293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46296 or the toolbar button
46299 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46302 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
46303 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
46304 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
46306 for some languages (such as English),
46307 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
46308 but also generic terms (such as
46317 related terms (such as
46320 \begin_inset space ~
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46343 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
46353 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
46356 \begin_layout Standard
46357 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
46358 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
46359 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
46362 \begin_layout Standard
46363 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
46369 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
46371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46375 \begin_inset space \space{}
46378 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
46379 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
46380 infinitive for verbs).
46382 looking up the word form
46387 while results are shown for the word form
46392 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
46393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46397 \begin_inset space \space{}
46409 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
46410 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
46411 thus the ending remains).
46414 \begin_layout Section
46416 \begin_inset Index idx
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46428 \begin_inset Index idx
46433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46452 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
46459 \begin_layout Standard
46460 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
46461 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
46462 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
46464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46469 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46471 \begin_inset space ~
46479 \begin_layout Standard
46480 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
46495 The color depends on the author that made the change.
46496 You can change the color in
46498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46499 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46510 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46516 \begin_inset Index idx
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46523 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
46538 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
46539 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
46542 arg "changes-merge"
46548 \begin_layout Standard
46549 When change tracking is activated,
46550 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
46552 \begin_inset Index idx
46557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46576 \begin_layout Standard
46577 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46583 \begin_layout Standard
46584 \begin_inset Graphics
46585 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
46593 \begin_layout Standard
46594 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46600 \begin_layout Standard
46601 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
46604 \begin_layout Standard
46605 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46611 \begin_layout Standard
46612 \begin_inset Tabular
46613 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
46614 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46615 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46616 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46626 arg "changes-track"
46634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46642 \begin_inset space ~
46645 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46647 \begin_inset space ~
46656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46665 arg "changes-output"
46673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46681 \begin_inset space ~
46684 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46686 \begin_inset space ~
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46694 \begin_inset space ~
46703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46724 Jumps to the next change
46730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46739 arg "change-accept"
46747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46755 \begin_inset space ~
46758 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46760 \begin_inset space ~
46769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46778 arg "change-reject"
46786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46794 \begin_inset space ~
46797 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46799 \begin_inset space ~
46808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46817 arg "changes-merge"
46825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46833 \begin_inset space ~
46836 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46838 \begin_inset space ~
46847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46856 arg "all-changes-accept"
46864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46872 \begin_inset space ~
46875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46877 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46899 arg "all-changes-reject"
46907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46915 \begin_inset space ~
46918 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46920 \begin_inset space ~
46924 \begin_inset space ~
46933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46957 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46959 \begin_inset space ~
46968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46991 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46993 \begin_inset space ~
47009 \begin_layout Standard
47010 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47016 \begin_layout Standard
47017 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
47018 especially no format changes like from
47037 \begin_layout Standard
47038 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
47040 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
47041 When you merge changes,
47042 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
47043 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
47044 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
47045 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
47048 \begin_layout Standard
47049 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
47052 \begin_layout Standard
47054 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
47055 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47061 \begin_inset Index idx
47066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47084 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
47087 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47094 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47100 \begin_layout Section
47101 Comparison of Documents
47102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47104 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47109 \begin_inset Index idx
47114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47115 Comparison of documents
47123 \begin_layout Standard
47124 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
47127 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47131 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
47132 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
47133 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
47134 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47141 \begin_inset space ~
47145 \begin_inset space ~
47154 \begin_inset space ~
47158 \begin_inset space ~
47162 \begin_inset space ~
47166 \begin_inset space ~
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47179 enables the change tracking option
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47190 \begin_inset space ~
47195 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
47198 \begin_layout Section
47199 International Support
47200 \begin_inset Index idx
47205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47206 International support
47214 \begin_layout Standard
47215 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
47216 with any language you want.
47217 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47220 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47222 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
47230 \begin_layout Standard
47233 also supports phonetic symbols,
47235 \begin_inset space ~
47239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47241 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
47249 \begin_layout Subsection
47251 \begin_inset Index idx
47256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47273 \begin_inset Index idx
47278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47280 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47295 \begin_inset Index idx
47300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47302 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 \begin_layout Standard
47322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47323 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47326 dialog lets you set
47329 the quote style and character encoding
47334 \begin_layout Standard
47339 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47349 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
47350 For details about the different encoding options see section
47351 \begin_inset space ~
47355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47357 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47365 \begin_layout Subsection
47366 Keyboard mapping configuration
47367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47369 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
47376 \begin_layout Standard
47377 If you have for example a U.
47378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47381 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
47382 you can use an alternate keymap.
47384 if you want to write in Italian,
47385 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
47386 to use an Italian keymap.
47389 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47390 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47391 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
47394 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47402 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47408 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
47411 \begin_layout Standard
47413 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
47417 normally write in Italian on a U.
47418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47421 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
47423 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
47424 This and many other customizations are explained in the
47431 \begin_layout Chapter
47434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47436 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
47443 \begin_layout Standard
47444 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
47445 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
47448 \begin_layout Section
47450 \begin_inset Index idx
47455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47457 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47474 \begin_layout Standard
47479 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
47482 \begin_layout Subsection
47486 \begin_layout Standard
47487 Creates a new document.
47490 \begin_layout Subsection
47494 \begin_layout Standard
47495 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
47496 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
47497 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
47499 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
47501 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
47506 \begin_layout Subsection
47510 \begin_layout Standard
47514 \begin_layout Subsection
47518 \begin_layout Standard
47519 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
47520 Click there on a file to open it.
47523 \begin_layout Subsection
47525 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
47529 \begin_layout Standard
47531 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
47532 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
47536 \begin_layout Subsection
47540 \begin_layout Standard
47541 Closes the current document.
47544 \begin_layout Subsection
47548 \begin_layout Standard
47549 Closes all opened documents.
47552 \begin_layout Subsection
47556 \begin_layout Standard
47557 Saves the actual document.
47560 \begin_layout Subsection
47564 \begin_layout Standard
47565 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
47566 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
47570 \begin_layout Subsection
47572 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
47576 \begin_layout Standard
47578 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
47579 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
47584 \begin_layout Subsection
47588 \begin_layout Standard
47589 Saves all opened documents.
47592 \begin_layout Subsection
47596 \begin_layout Standard
47597 Reloads the actual document from disk.
47600 \begin_layout Subsection
47604 \begin_layout Standard
47605 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
47606 It is described in the section
47608 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
47613 Additional Features
47618 \begin_layout Subsection
47622 \begin_layout Standard
47623 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
47629 plain text files and comma separated,
47630 table-like text files (CSV).
47631 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
47635 \begin_layout Standard
47636 When using the menu entry
47639 \begin_inset space ~
47645 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
47646 when using the menu entry
47649 \begin_inset space ~
47653 \begin_inset space ~
47657 \begin_inset space ~
47663 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
47664 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
47667 \begin_layout Subsection
47669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47671 name "subsec:Export"
47678 \begin_layout Standard
47679 You can export your document to various file formats.
47680 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47682 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
47683 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
47684 during its configuration.
47687 \begin_layout Standard
47688 Here is a list of all available entries;
47689 some of them are explained in detail in section
47690 \begin_inset space ~
47694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47696 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47704 \begin_layout Description
47710 \begin_inset space ~
47713 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47718 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47719 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47720 \begin_inset Newline newline
47723 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47724 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47728 \begin_layout Description
47729 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47734 \begin_layout Description
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47739 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47744 \begin_layout Description
47745 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47746 's native DVI-format.
47747 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47749 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47756 \begin_layout Description
47757 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47760 \begin_layout Description
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47769 ) DVI-format using the program
47771 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47775 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47789 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47797 \begin_layout Description
47799 \begin_inset space ~
47802 (cropped) the same as
47806 but with cropped page margins.
47809 \begin_layout Description
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47814 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47818 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47823 \begin_layout Description
47828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47837 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47845 \begin_layout Description
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47851 \begin_inset space ~
47854 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47859 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47866 \begin_layout Description
47870 \begin_inset space ~
47879 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47880 source that is compilable with the program
47882 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47886 \begin_layout Description
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47895 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47897 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47907 \begin_layout Description
47911 \begin_inset space ~
47916 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47918 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47919 only this format is readable by the
47926 \begin_layout Description
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47939 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47940 source that is compilable with the program
47946 \begin_layout Description
47948 \begin_inset space ~
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47959 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47960 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47965 \begin_layout Description
47967 \begin_inset space ~
47970 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47971 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47977 \begin_inset space \space{}
47982 \begin_inset space ~
47987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48002 represent the version number)
48005 \begin_layout Description
48007 \begin_inset space ~
48011 \begin_inset space ~
48014 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
48016 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48021 \begin_layout Description
48022 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
48023 's internal XHTML engine
48026 \begin_layout Description
48028 \begin_inset space ~
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48036 \begin_inset space ~
48040 \begin_inset space ~
48043 XML Office Open XML file,
48049 For the conversion the program
48058 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48061 \begin_layout Description
48062 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
48067 \begin_layout Description
48069 \begin_inset space ~
48072 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
48082 For the conversion the program
48091 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48094 \begin_layout Description
48096 \begin_inset space ~
48099 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
48100 For the conversion the program
48109 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48112 \begin_layout Description
48114 \begin_inset space ~
48117 (cropped) the same as
48120 \begin_inset space ~
48125 but with cropped page margins
48128 \begin_layout Description
48132 \begin_inset space ~
48137 PDF-format using the program
48142 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
48145 \begin_layout Description
48149 \begin_inset space ~
48153 \begin_inset space ~
48161 \begin_inset space ~
48166 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
48167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48171 \begin_inset space \space{}
48174 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
48177 \begin_layout Description
48181 \begin_inset space ~
48186 PDF-format using the program
48188 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48192 produces PDF-files directly
48195 \begin_layout Description
48199 \begin_inset space ~
48204 PDF-format using the program
48209 produces PDF-files directly
48212 \begin_layout Description
48216 \begin_inset space ~
48221 PDF-format using the program
48226 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
48229 \begin_layout Description
48233 \begin_inset space ~
48238 PDF-format using the program
48244 produces PDF-files directly
48247 \begin_layout Description
48251 \begin_inset space ~
48259 \begin_layout Description
48263 \begin_inset space ~
48267 \begin_inset space ~
48273 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
48278 \begin_layout Description
48283 PostScript format using the program
48292 options see section
48293 \begin_inset space ~
48297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48299 reference "subsec:General-output"
48307 \begin_layout Description
48308 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48309 source and also code in the statistical programming language
48322 it is possible to use
48326 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48330 \begin_layout Standard
48331 If one of the menu entries
48339 \begin_inset space ~
48349 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48351 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
48354 \begin_inset space ~
48358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48360 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48366 \begin_inset Index idx
48371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48372 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48381 \begin_layout Subsection
48385 \begin_layout Standard
48386 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
48389 \begin_inset space ~
48393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48395 reference "sec:Paths"
48401 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
48410 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
48411 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
48412 's preferences as described in section
48413 \begin_inset space ~
48417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48419 reference "subsec:Converters"
48427 \begin_layout Subsection
48428 New and Close Window
48431 \begin_layout Standard
48432 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48436 \begin_layout Subsection
48440 \begin_layout Standard
48441 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
48444 \begin_layout Section
48446 \begin_inset Index idx
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48470 \begin_layout Subsection
48474 \begin_layout Standard
48475 Described in section
48476 \begin_inset space ~
48480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48482 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
48490 \begin_layout Subsection
48498 \begin_layout Standard
48499 Described in section
48500 \begin_inset space ~
48504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48506 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48514 \begin_layout Subsection
48518 \begin_layout Standard
48519 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
48520 If the cursor is outside an inset,
48521 the whole document will be selected.
48524 \begin_layout Subsection
48528 \begin_layout Standard
48529 Selects the whole document.
48532 \begin_layout Subsection
48533 Find & Replace (Quick)
48536 \begin_layout Standard
48537 Described in section
48538 \begin_inset space ~
48542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48544 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48552 \begin_layout Subsection
48553 Find & Replace (Advanced)
48556 \begin_layout Standard
48557 Described in section
48558 \begin_inset space ~
48562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48564 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
48572 \begin_layout Subsection
48573 Move Paragraph Up/Down
48576 \begin_layout Standard
48577 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
48580 \begin_layout Subsection
48582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48586 \begin_layout Standard
48588 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48589 Described in section
48590 \begin_inset space ~
48594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48596 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48606 \begin_layout Subsection
48608 \begin_inset Index idx
48613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48615 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48632 \begin_layout Standard
48633 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
48634 line spacing and label width.
48635 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
48638 \begin_layout Standard
48639 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
48645 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48646 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48648 \begin_inset space ~
48654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
48658 \begin_layout Subsection
48660 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
48664 \begin_layout Standard
48666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48667 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
48671 \begin_layout Enumerate
48673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
48674 Customize text properties by means of the
48680 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
48684 this is described in section
48685 \begin_inset space ~
48689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48691 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48699 \begin_layout Enumerate
48701 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
48702 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
48704 Apply last settings
48707 \begin_layout Enumerate
48709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48710 Change the casing of selected text (
48727 \begin_layout Subsection
48729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48733 \begin_layout Standard
48735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48736 This sub-menu only appears
48737 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48739 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48740 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48766 \begin_inset space ~
48770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48772 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48782 \begin_layout Subsection
48783 Table and Rows & Columns
48786 \begin_layout Standard
48787 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48788 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48789 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48792 \begin_layout Subsection
48796 \begin_layout Standard
48797 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48798 It will dissolve this inset.
48799 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48802 \begin_layout Subsection
48806 \begin_layout Standard
48807 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48808 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48811 \begin_layout Subsection
48812 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48815 \begin_layout Standard
48816 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48817 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48818 \begin_inset space ~
48822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48824 reference "sec:Nesting"
48830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48832 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48840 \begin_layout Section
48842 \begin_inset Index idx
48847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48866 \begin_layout Standard
48867 At the bottom of the
48871 menu the opened documents are listed.
48874 \begin_layout Subsection
48875 Open/Close all Insets
48878 \begin_layout Standard
48879 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48882 \begin_layout Subsection
48883 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48886 \begin_layout Standard
48887 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48890 \begin_layout Standard
48891 Math macros are described in the
48898 \begin_layout Subsection
48902 \begin_layout Standard
48903 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48904 \begin_inset space ~
48908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48910 reference "sec:Navigating"
48916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48918 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48926 \begin_layout Subsection
48930 \begin_layout Standard
48931 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48932 as described in section
48933 \begin_inset space ~
48937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48939 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48947 \begin_layout Subsection
48951 \begin_layout Standard
48952 Opens a window showing console messages.
48953 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48959 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48960 is processing the document.
48963 \begin_layout Subsection
48965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48967 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48972 \begin_inset Index idx
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48986 \begin_layout Standard
48987 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48988 All toolbars and the
48991 \begin_inset space ~
49009 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
49011 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
49013 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
49017 \begin_layout Standard
49019 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
49023 \begin_inset space ~
49044 \begin_inset space ~
49057 \begin_inset space ~
49062 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
49065 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
49070 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
49072 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
49087 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
49088 denoted in the menu with the suffix
49097 \begin_layout Standard
49102 state the toolbar is permanently shown
49103 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
49109 state it is never shown
49116 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
49117 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
49118 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
49119 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
49121 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
49126 \begin_layout Standard
49128 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
49129 \begin_inset space ~
49133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49135 reference "sec:Toolbars"
49143 \begin_layout Subsection
49147 \begin_layout Standard
49151 \begin_inset space ~
49155 \begin_inset space ~
49159 \begin_inset space ~
49163 \begin_inset space ~
49167 \begin_inset space ~
49171 \begin_inset space ~
49176 will split \SpecialChar LyX
49177 's main window vertically while
49180 \begin_inset space ~
49184 \begin_inset space ~
49188 \begin_inset space ~
49192 \begin_inset space ~
49196 \begin_inset space ~
49200 \begin_inset space ~
49205 will split it horizontally.
49206 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
49207 or to view the same document,
49208 but at different positions.
49209 You can even split the main window several times to view,
49211 three or more documents at the same time.
49212 To close a split view,
49216 \begin_inset space ~
49220 \begin_inset space ~
49228 \begin_layout Subsection
49232 \begin_layout Standard
49233 Closes a split view.
49236 \begin_layout Subsection
49240 \begin_layout Standard
49241 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
49242 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
49243 's main window fullscreen.
49244 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
49246 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
49249 \begin_layout Section
49251 \begin_inset Index idx
49256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49275 \begin_layout Subsection
49279 \begin_layout Standard
49280 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
49281 \begin_inset space ~
49285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49287 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
49299 \begin_layout Subsection
49301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49303 name "subsec:Special-Character"
49310 \begin_layout Standard
49311 Here you can insert the following characters:
49314 \begin_layout Description
49319 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49321 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
49322 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49323 -packages you have installed.
49324 You can get a complete display by checking
49327 \begin_inset space ~
49333 \begin_inset Newline newline
49337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49346 Not all characters will be visible in the
49350 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
49351 \begin_inset space ~
49355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49357 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49362 ) can display every character.
49370 \begin_layout Description
49371 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
49376 \begin_layout Description
49378 \begin_inset space ~
49382 \begin_inset space ~
49385 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
49386 \begin_inset space ~
49390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49392 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
49400 \begin_layout Description
49402 \begin_inset space ~
49405 Quote Inserts this quote:
49407 no matter what quote style you selected in the
49409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49410 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49416 \begin_layout Description
49418 \begin_inset space ~
49421 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
49423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49424 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49430 \begin_layout Description
49432 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
49434 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
49438 \begin_inset space ~
49441 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
49442 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
49444 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
49448 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
49452 \begin_layout Description
49454 \begin_inset space ~
49457 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
49458 \SpecialChar breakableslash
49462 \begin_layout Description
49464 \begin_inset space ~
49468 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
49469 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
49475 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49480 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49486 \begin_inset space \space{}
49489 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49490 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49500 To insert a fraction use the command
49505 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49509 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49518 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49525 \begin_layout Description
49527 \begin_inset space ~
49530 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
49531 \SpecialChar menuseparator
49535 \begin_layout Description
49537 \begin_inset space ~
49541 \begin_inset Index idx
49546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49553 \begin_inset Index idx
49558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49560 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49574 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
49575 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49581 \begin_inset Index idx
49586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49604 \begin_inset Newline newline
49607 More information about this feature can be found in the
49613 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49619 \begin_layout Description
49620 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
49625 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
49629 \begin_layout Subsection
49633 \begin_layout Standard
49634 Opens a submenu with the following options:
49637 \begin_layout Description
49638 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
49640 \begin_inset script superscript
49642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49652 \begin_layout Description
49653 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
49655 \begin_inset script subscript
49657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49666 \begin_layout Description
49668 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
49670 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
49674 \begin_inset space ~
49678 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
49680 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
49683 space as described in section
49684 \begin_inset space ~
49688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49690 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
49698 \begin_layout Description
49700 \begin_inset space ~
49703 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
49704 \begin_inset space ~
49708 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49712 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49718 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49722 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49732 \begin_layout Description
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49737 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49738 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49744 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49752 \begin_layout Description
49754 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49756 \begin_inset space ~
49759 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49765 \begin_inset space \space{}
49768 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49769 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49779 To insert a fraction use the command
49784 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49788 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49797 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49806 \begin_layout Description
49808 \begin_inset space ~
49811 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49812 \begin_inset space ~
49816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49818 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49826 \begin_layout Description
49828 \begin_inset space ~
49831 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49832 \begin_inset space ~
49836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49838 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49846 \begin_layout Description
49848 \begin_inset space ~
49851 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49852 \begin_inset space ~
49856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49858 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49866 \begin_layout Description
49867 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49868 \begin_inset space ~
49872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49874 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49882 \begin_layout Description
49884 \begin_inset space ~
49887 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49888 \begin_inset space ~
49892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49894 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49902 \begin_layout Description
49904 \begin_inset space ~
49907 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49908 \begin_inset space ~
49912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49914 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49922 \begin_layout Description
49924 \begin_inset space ~
49928 \begin_inset space ~
49931 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49933 \begin_inset space ~
49937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49939 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49947 for a usage example.
49950 \begin_layout Description
49952 \begin_inset space ~
49956 \begin_inset space ~
49959 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49960 \begin_inset space ~
49964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49966 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49974 \begin_layout Description
49976 \begin_inset space ~
49979 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49980 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49983 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49984 \begin_inset space ~
49988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49990 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49998 \begin_layout Description
50000 \begin_inset space ~
50003 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
50004 \begin_inset space ~
50008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50010 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
50018 \begin_layout Description
50020 \begin_inset space ~
50023 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
50024 as described in section
50025 \begin_inset space ~
50029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50031 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
50037 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
50041 \begin_layout Description
50043 \change_deleted 5863208 1686701518
50045 \change_inserted 5863208 1686701520
50047 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
50049 \begin_inset space ~
50053 \begin_inset space ~
50056 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
50057 to prevent a page break at the given position.
50059 \begin_inset space ~
50063 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
50065 \begin_inset space ~
50069 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
50071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50073 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
50083 \begin_layout Description
50085 \begin_inset space ~
50088 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
50089 \begin_inset space ~
50093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50095 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
50103 \begin_layout Description
50105 \begin_inset space ~
50109 \begin_inset space ~
50112 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
50113 \begin_inset space ~
50117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50119 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
50127 \begin_layout Subsection
50129 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50133 \begin_layout Standard
50135 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50136 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
50137 The submenu allows you to insert
50140 \begin_layout Description
50142 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50144 \begin_inset space ~
50147 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
50150 \begin_layout Description
50152 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50154 \begin_inset space ~
50158 \begin_inset space ~
50161 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
50164 \begin_layout Description
50166 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50168 \begin_inset space ~
50171 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
50174 \begin_layout Description
50176 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50178 \begin_inset space ~
50181 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
50184 \begin_layout Description
50186 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50188 \begin_inset space ~
50192 \begin_inset space ~
50195 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
50198 \begin_layout Description
50200 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50202 \begin_inset space ~
50205 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
50208 \begin_layout Description
50210 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
50212 \begin_inset space ~
50216 \begin_inset space ~
50220 \begin_inset space ~
50223 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
50226 \begin_layout Description
50228 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
50230 \begin_inset space ~
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50237 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
50239 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
50242 \begin_layout Description
50244 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50246 \begin_inset space ~
50249 Name inserts the user name as specified in
50251 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50252 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50258 \begin_layout Description
50260 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50262 \begin_inset space ~
50265 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
50267 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50268 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50274 \begin_layout Description
50276 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50277 Other\SpecialChar ldots
50278 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
50281 \begin_layout Subsection
50284 List/Contents/References
50287 \begin_layout Standard
50288 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
50292 \begin_inset space ~
50316 are described in section
50317 \begin_inset space ~
50321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50323 reference "sec:toc"
50333 is described in section
50334 \begin_inset space ~
50338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50340 reference "sec:Index"
50350 is described in section
50351 \begin_inset space ~
50355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50357 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50364 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50367 is described in section
50368 \begin_inset space ~
50372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50374 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50382 \begin_layout Subsection
50386 \begin_layout Standard
50388 as described in section
50389 \begin_inset space ~
50393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50395 reference "sec:Floats"
50400 and in detail the chapter
50407 \begin_inset space ~
50415 \begin_layout Subsection
50419 \begin_layout Standard
50421 described in section
50422 \begin_inset space ~
50426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50428 reference "sec:Notes"
50436 \begin_layout Subsection
50440 \begin_layout Standard
50441 Inserts a branch inset,
50443 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
50444 Branches are described in section
50445 \begin_inset space ~
50449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50451 reference "sec:Branches"
50459 \begin_layout Subsection
50463 \begin_layout Standard
50464 Inserts document class-specific insets.
50465 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
50466 An example is the document class
50467 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
50469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50477 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
50481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50486 with three custom insets.
50489 Flex insets and InsetLayout
50493 Installing New Document Classes,
50494 The Layout file format
50500 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
50503 \begin_layout Subsection
50505 \begin_inset Index idx
50510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50519 \begin_layout Standard
50520 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
50521 For more information see chapter
50523 External Document Parts
50526 \begin_inset space ~
50532 \begin_layout Subsection
50534 \begin_inset Index idx
50539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50548 \begin_layout Standard
50549 Inserts a box in a certain style.
50550 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
50557 \begin_inset space ~
50565 \begin_layout Subsection
50569 \begin_layout Standard
50574 dialog as described in section
50575 \begin_inset space ~
50579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50581 reference "sec:Bibliography"
50589 \begin_layout Subsection
50593 \begin_layout Standard
50598 as described in section
50599 \begin_inset space ~
50603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50605 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50613 \begin_layout Subsection
50617 \begin_layout Standard
50622 as described in section
50623 \begin_inset space ~
50627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50629 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50637 \begin_layout Subsection
50639 \begin_inset Index idx
50644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50651 \begin_inset Index idx
50656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50658 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50668 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50685 \begin_layout Standard
50686 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
50687 Floats are described in section
50688 \begin_inset space ~
50692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50694 reference "sec:Floats"
50700 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
50703 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
50711 \begin_inset space ~
50719 \begin_layout Subsection
50723 \begin_layout Standard
50724 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50725 \begin_inset space ~
50729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50731 reference "sec:Index"
50739 \begin_layout Subsection
50743 \begin_layout Standard
50744 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50745 \begin_inset space ~
50749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50751 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50759 \begin_layout Subsection
50763 \begin_layout Standard
50764 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50765 Tables are described in section
50766 \begin_inset space ~
50770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50772 reference "sec:Tables"
50777 and in detail in the chapter
50784 \begin_inset space ~
50792 \begin_layout Subsection
50796 \begin_layout Standard
50802 Graphics are described in section
50803 \begin_inset space ~
50807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50809 reference "sec:Graphics"
50817 \begin_layout Subsection
50821 \begin_layout Standard
50822 Inserts a URL as described in section
50823 \begin_inset space ~
50827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50829 reference "subsec:URLs"
50837 \begin_layout Subsection
50841 \begin_layout Standard
50842 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50843 \begin_inset space ~
50847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50849 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50857 \begin_layout Subsection
50861 \begin_layout Standard
50862 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50863 \begin_inset space ~
50867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50869 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50877 \begin_layout Subsection
50881 \begin_layout Standard
50882 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50883 \begin_inset space ~
50887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50889 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50897 \begin_layout Subsection
50900 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50903 \begin_layout Standard
50904 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50906 \begin_inset space ~
50910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50912 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50917 for an explanation.
50920 \begin_layout Subsection
50924 \begin_layout Standard
50925 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50926 in or behind a section heading,
50927 title or caption of a float.
50928 Inserts a short title as described in section
50929 \begin_inset space ~
50933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50935 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50943 \begin_layout Subsection
50948 \begin_layout Standard
50949 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50950 Code box as described in section
50951 \begin_inset space ~
50955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50957 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50965 \begin_layout Subsection
50967 \begin_inset Index idx
50972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50981 \begin_layout Standard
50982 Inserts a program listings box.
50983 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50985 Program Code Listings
50990 \begin_inset space ~
50998 \begin_layout Subsection
51000 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
51004 \begin_layout Standard
51006 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
51007 Inserts the actual date.
51008 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
51014 \begin_layout Subsection
51018 \begin_layout Standard
51019 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
51020 \begin_inset space ~
51024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51026 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51034 \begin_layout Section
51036 \begin_inset Index idx
51041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51043 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51060 \begin_layout Standard
51061 This menu lists the existing chapters,
51066 \begin_inset space ~
51069 of the current document.
51070 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
51073 \begin_layout Subsection
51077 \begin_layout Standard
51078 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
51079 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
51082 \begin_inset space ~
51086 To create bookmarks for this example,
51088 \begin_inset space ~
51091 2.5 and use the submenu
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51098 \begin_inset space ~
51105 \begin_inset space ~
51111 \begin_inset space ~
51115 \begin_inset space ~
51121 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
51124 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
51130 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
51133 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
51136 \begin_layout Standard
51138 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
51139 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
51145 \begin_inset space ~
51150 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
51153 \begin_inset space ~
51158 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
51161 \begin_layout Subsection
51167 \begin_layout Standard
51168 Jump to the next note,
51170 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
51173 \begin_layout Subsection
51177 \begin_layout Standard
51178 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
51179 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
51180 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
51183 \begin_inset space ~
51187 \begin_inset space ~
51195 \begin_layout Subsection
51199 \begin_layout Standard
51200 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
51203 The \SpecialChar LyX
51204 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
51206 \begin_inset space ~
51214 \begin_inset space ~
51219 manual for a detailed description.
51222 \begin_layout Section
51224 \begin_inset Index idx
51229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51231 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51248 \begin_layout Subsection
51252 \begin_layout Standard
51253 Change Tracking is described in section
51254 \begin_inset space ~
51258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51260 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51268 \begin_layout Subsection
51276 \begin_layout Standard
51277 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
51278 by viewing or exporting a document,
51279 this menu will be enabled.
51280 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51282 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
51284 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
51285 \begin_inset Newline newline
51288 With the help of the logfile,
51289 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51293 \begin_layout Standard
51296 Open Containing Directory
51298 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
51299 's temporary folder for the document.
51300 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
51301 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
51302 For example some journals require to send the
51306 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51310 \begin_layout Subsection
51311 Start Appendix Here
51314 \begin_layout Standard
51315 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
51316 \begin_inset space ~
51320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51322 reference "sec:Appendices"
51330 \begin_layout Subsection
51332 \begin_inset space ~
51338 \begin_layout Standard
51339 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
51341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51343 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51345 \begin_inset space ~
51349 \begin_inset space ~
51356 \begin_inset space ~
51360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51362 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51367 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
51370 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51371 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51373 \begin_inset space ~
51376 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51378 \begin_inset space ~
51381 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51383 \begin_inset space ~
51387 \begin_inset space ~
51394 \begin_inset space ~
51398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51400 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51405 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
51406 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51409 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51411 \begin_inset space ~
51414 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51416 \begin_inset space ~
51419 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51424 \begin_inset space ~
51428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51430 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51436 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51437 when it is first configured.
51438 The default output format is
51441 \begin_inset space ~
51449 \begin_layout Subsection
51450 View (Other Formats)
51453 \begin_layout Standard
51454 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
51455 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
51456 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
51457 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51458 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
51460 All possible formats are listed in section
51461 \begin_inset space ~
51465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51467 reference "subsec:Export"
51473 You should at least see the menu entry
51479 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51481 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
51483 \begin_inset space ~
51487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51489 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51495 \begin_inset Index idx
51500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51510 \begin_layout Standard
51511 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
51512 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51515 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51520 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51522 \begin_inset space ~
51525 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51530 \begin_inset space ~
51534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51536 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51542 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51543 when it is first configured.
51546 \begin_layout Subsection
51548 \begin_inset space ~
51554 \begin_layout Standard
51555 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
51558 \begin_layout Subsection
51559 Update (Other Formats)
51562 \begin_layout Standard
51563 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
51566 \begin_layout Subsection
51567 View Master Document
51570 \begin_layout Standard
51571 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51587 \begin_inset space ~
51592 manual for more information on this topic).
51593 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
51595 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
51599 \begin_inset space ~
51603 \begin_inset space ~
51608 generates the output of the whole book,
51613 will just output the chapter alone.
51616 \begin_layout Standard
51617 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51620 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51621 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51623 \begin_inset space ~
51627 \begin_inset space ~
51634 \begin_inset space ~
51638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51640 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51645 ) or in the preferences (menu
51647 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51648 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51650 \begin_inset space ~
51653 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51655 \begin_inset space ~
51658 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51660 \begin_inset space ~
51664 \begin_inset space ~
51671 \begin_inset space ~
51675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51677 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51685 \begin_layout Subsection
51686 Update Master Document
51689 \begin_layout Standard
51690 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51706 \begin_inset space ~
51711 manual for more information on this topic).
51712 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51715 \begin_layout Standard
51716 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51720 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51722 \begin_inset space ~
51726 \begin_inset space ~
51733 \begin_inset space ~
51737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51739 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51744 ) or in the preferences (menu
51746 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51747 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51749 \begin_inset space ~
51752 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51754 \begin_inset space ~
51757 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51759 \begin_inset space ~
51763 \begin_inset space ~
51770 \begin_inset space ~
51774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51776 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51784 \begin_layout Subsection
51786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51788 name "subsec:Compressed"
51795 \begin_layout Standard
51796 Un/compresses the current document.
51797 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51799 Additional Features
51801 manual for details).
51804 \begin_layout Subsection
51808 \begin_layout Standard
51809 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51812 \begin_layout Subsection
51816 \begin_layout Standard
51817 The document settings are described in appendix
51818 \begin_inset space ~
51822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51824 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51832 \begin_layout Section
51834 \begin_inset Index idx
51839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51858 \begin_layout Subsection
51862 \begin_layout Standard
51863 Spell checking is explained in section
51864 \begin_inset space ~
51868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51870 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51878 \begin_layout Subsection
51882 \begin_layout Standard
51883 The thesaurus is described in section
51884 \begin_inset space ~
51888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51890 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51898 \begin_layout Subsection
51900 \begin_inset Index idx
51905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51912 \begin_inset Index idx
51917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51926 \begin_layout Standard
51927 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51930 \begin_layout Subsection
51936 \begin_inset Index idx
51941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51942 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51951 \begin_layout Standard
51952 Generates with the help of the program
51954 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51957 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51958 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51959 This feature is not available on Windows.
51962 \begin_layout Subsection
51968 \begin_inset Index idx
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51983 \begin_layout Standard
51984 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51989 \begin_inset space ~
51994 to see the full filename paths.
51997 \begin_layout Subsection
51999 \begin_inset Index idx
52004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52013 \begin_layout Standard
52014 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
52015 files as described in section
52016 \begin_inset space ~
52020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52022 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
52030 \begin_layout Subsection
52032 \begin_inset Index idx
52037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52040 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52050 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
52053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52054 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
52066 \begin_inset Index idx
52071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52072 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
52081 \begin_layout Standard
52082 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
52086 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52087 -packages and programs it needs;
52089 \begin_inset space ~
52093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52095 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
52103 \begin_layout Subsection
52107 \begin_layout Standard
52112 dialog as described in detail in appendix
52113 \begin_inset space ~
52117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52119 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52127 \begin_layout Section
52129 \begin_inset Index idx
52134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52136 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52153 \begin_layout Standard
52154 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
52155 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
52157 If a file is not available in this language,
52158 the English version will be listed.
52161 \begin_layout Standard
52165 \begin_inset space ~
52170 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
52171 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52172 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
52174 \begin_inset space ~
52178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52180 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
52188 \begin_layout Standard
52192 \begin_inset space ~
52197 gives information about the copyright,
52198 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
52199 version you are using.
52202 \begin_layout Section
52204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52206 name "sec:Toolbars"
52213 \begin_layout Standard
52214 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
52215 \begin_inset space ~
52219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52221 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
52229 \begin_layout Standard
52230 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
52231 This is described in the
52233 Additional Features
52238 \begin_layout Subsection
52240 \begin_inset Index idx
52245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52247 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52264 \begin_layout Standard
52265 \begin_inset Graphics
52266 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
52274 \begin_layout Standard
52275 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52281 \begin_layout Standard
52282 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52298 \begin_inset Note Note
52301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52302 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
52307 manual for more information.
52315 \begin_layout Standard
52316 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52322 \begin_layout Standard
52323 \begin_inset Tabular
52324 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
52325 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52326 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52327 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52333 \begin_inset Graphics
52334 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
52344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52348 pull-down box for the environments
52361 \begin_layout Standard
52362 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
52368 \begin_layout Standard
52370 \begin_inset Tabular
52371 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
52372 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52373 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52374 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52398 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52428 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52458 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52474 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
52482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52504 arg "spelling-continuously"
52512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52516 Spellcheck continuously
52522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52665 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52667 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
52672 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52690 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
52698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52730 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52772 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52786 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52787 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52817 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52820 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52822 \begin_inset space ~
52825 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52833 arg "dialog-show character"
52844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52865 Set text to noun style,
52867 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52870 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52872 \begin_inset space ~
52875 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52883 arg "dialog-show character"
52894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52900 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52903 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52916 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52919 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52932 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52937 arg "textstyle-apply"
52947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52952 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52953 Format text using the current settings in the
52955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52957 \begin_inset space ~
52960 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52995 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52997 \begin_inset space ~
53006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53015 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
53023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53043 arg "tabular-insert"
53051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53070 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
53073 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
53081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53086 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
53089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53105 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
53113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53117 Toggle outline window on/off,
53120 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53136 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
53144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53148 Toggle math toolbar on/off
53154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53163 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
53171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53175 Toggle table toolbar on/off
53188 \begin_layout Subsection
53190 \begin_inset Index idx
53195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53197 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53214 \begin_layout Standard
53215 \begin_inset Graphics
53216 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
53224 \begin_layout Standard
53225 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53231 \begin_layout Standard
53232 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53235 \begin_layout Standard
53236 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53242 \begin_layout Standard
53243 \begin_inset Tabular
53244 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
53245 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53284 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
53292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53311 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
53319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53338 arg "layout-toggle List"
53346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53365 arg "layout-toggle Description"
53373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53392 arg "depth-increment"
53400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53406 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53408 \begin_inset space ~
53412 \begin_inset space ~
53421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53430 arg "depth-decrement"
53438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53444 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53446 \begin_inset space ~
53450 \begin_inset space ~
53459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53468 arg "float-insert figure"
53476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53483 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53499 arg "float-insert table"
53507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53514 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53560 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
53568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53590 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
53598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53636 \begin_inset space ~
53645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53654 arg "nomencl-insert"
53662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53670 \begin_inset space ~
53679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53688 arg "footnote-insert"
53696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53718 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53734 \begin_inset space ~
53743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53767 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53769 \begin_inset space ~
53778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53787 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53863 \begin_inset space ~
53872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53881 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53896 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53912 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53927 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53929 \begin_inset space ~
53938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53947 arg "dialog-show character"
53955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53963 \begin_inset space ~
53966 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53979 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53984 arg "textstyle-apply"
53992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53997 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
53998 Format text using the recent settings in the
54001 arg "dialog-show character"
54010 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54019 arg "layout-paragraph"
54027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54033 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
54035 \begin_inset space ~
54044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54053 arg "thesaurus-entry"
54061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54067 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54081 \begin_layout Subsection
54082 View/Update Toolbar
54083 \begin_inset Index idx
54088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54090 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54107 \begin_layout Standard
54108 \begin_inset Graphics
54109 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
54116 \begin_layout Standard
54117 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
54123 \begin_layout Standard
54124 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
54127 \begin_layout Standard
54128 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
54134 \begin_layout Standard
54135 \begin_inset Tabular
54136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
54137 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
54138 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
54139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
54140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54179 arg "buffer-update"
54187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54209 arg "master-buffer-view"
54217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54225 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
54227 \begin_inset space ~
54233 \begin_inset space ~
54242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54251 arg "master-buffer-update"
54259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54267 \begin_inset space ~
54271 \begin_inset space ~
54280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54289 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
54297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54304 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54306 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
54308 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
54311 \SpecialChar menuseparator
54312 Synchronize with Output
54318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54329 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
54339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54346 View (Other Formats)
54352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54359 arg "update-others"
54363 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
54371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54378 Update (Other Formats)
54391 \begin_layout Standard
54393 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
54394 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
54399 \begin_layout Subsection
54403 \begin_layout Standard
54404 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
54405 \begin_inset space ~
54409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54411 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54418 \begin_inset Index idx
54423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54425 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54442 \begin_inset space ~
54447 manual and the math macro toolbar
54448 \begin_inset Index idx
54453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54455 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54476 \begin_layout Chapter
54477 The Document Settings
54478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54480 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
54485 \begin_inset Index idx
54490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54492 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54509 \begin_layout Standard
54513 \begin_inset space ~
54518 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
54520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54524 You can save your document settings as default with the
54526 Save as Document Defaults
54528 button in any dialog.
54529 This will create a template named
54533 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
54534 when you create a new document without using a template.
54537 \begin_layout Standard
54542 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
54543 This affects mostly class options,
54544 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
54547 \begin_layout Standard
54548 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
54549 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
54550 To find a setting quicker,
54551 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
54553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54557 \begin_inset space \space{}
54561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54569 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
54570 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
54571 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
54574 \begin_layout Section
54578 \begin_layout Standard
54579 Here you set the document class,
54582 and a master document.
54583 Document classes are described in section
54584 \begin_inset space ~
54588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54590 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
54598 \begin_layout Standard
54602 \begin_inset space ~
54607 you can load you own layout-file,
54608 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
54613 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
54614 as a layout for a document class.
54615 For more about layout-files,
54618 Installing New Document Classes,
54619 Types of Layout Files
54628 \begin_layout Standard
54629 Some classes use special class options by default.
54630 If this is the case,
54631 they are listed in the field
54635 and you can decide to use them or not.
54636 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
54637 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
54642 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54644 color and page layout packages.
54650 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54652 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
54656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54657 When you want to use one of the following drivers
54658 \begin_inset Newline newline
54672 \begin_inset Newline newline
54675 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54684 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
54697 \begin_layout Standard
54702 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
54703 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
54704 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
54705 This way child documents are always compilable.
54706 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54713 \begin_inset space ~
54721 \begin_layout Standard
54722 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54732 \begin_inset Index idx
54737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54740 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54755 \begin_inset Index idx
54760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54763 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54777 for cross-references,
54779 \begin_inset space ~
54783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54785 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54793 \begin_layout Section
54797 \begin_layout Standard
54798 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54799 Please refer to the section
54802 \begin_inset space ~
54810 \begin_inset space ~
54815 manual for details.
54818 \begin_layout Section
54822 \begin_layout Standard
54823 Modules are explained in section
54824 \begin_inset space ~
54828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54830 reference "subsec:Modules"
54838 \begin_layout Section
54842 \begin_layout Standard
54844 \begin_inset space ~
54848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54850 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54858 \begin_layout Section
54862 \begin_layout Standard
54863 The document font settings are described in section
54864 \begin_inset space ~
54868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54870 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54878 \begin_layout Section
54882 \begin_layout Standard
54883 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54895 \begin_inset space ~
54900 and whether it should be a
54903 \begin_inset space ~
54908 can also be specified here.
54911 \begin_layout Standard
54912 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54913 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54914 That would be impractical,
54916 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54918 it will be as you specified in the output.
54921 \begin_layout Standard
54924 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54927 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54928 justifies the text on screen.
54929 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54931 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54935 \begin_layout Standard
54937 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54946 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54951 \begin_layout Section
54955 \begin_layout Standard
54956 This dialog is described in sections
54957 \begin_inset space ~
54961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54963 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54971 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54979 \begin_layout Section
54983 \begin_layout Standard
54984 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54985 \begin_inset space ~
54989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54991 reference "subsec:Margins"
54999 \begin_layout Section
55001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55003 name "sec:Language-encodings"
55008 \begin_inset Index idx
55013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55015 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55032 \begin_layout Standard
55033 The document language and quote styles are set here.
55034 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
55035 (the \SpecialChar LyX
55036 file is always encoded in utf8).
55037 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
55038 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
55039 -command is not known for a particular character).
55040 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
55044 \begin_layout Standard
55046 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
55049 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
55050 files in Unicode – or utf8,
55051 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
55052 's default encoding).
55053 This should normally fit your needs,
55054 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
55055 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
55056 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
55057 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
55059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55067 encodings is necessary.
55070 \begin_layout Standard
55072 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
55074 provides support for these traditional encodings.
55077 Traditional (auto-selected)
55085 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
55087 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
55091 \begin_layout Standard
55093 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
55094 If you use the option
55100 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
55103 If the document contains text in more than one language you
55104 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
55107 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55110 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
55111 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
55112 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
55117 \begin_layout Standard
55119 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
55128 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
55130 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
55134 \begin_layout Standard
55136 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
55138 you can also select
55143 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
55144 Note that this encoding is then used for
55149 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
55152 \begin_layout Standard
55154 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55156 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
55160 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
55161 Do not load inputenc
55162 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55166 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
55168 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
55170 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55172 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
55173 in the next dropdown menu
55174 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55175 does what it states:
55177 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
55179 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
55181 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55182 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
55183 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55189 \begin_inset Index idx
55194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55196 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
55201 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55206 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
55220 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
55222 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55224 Note that this option is only available for the standard
55230 Traditional (auto-selected)
55237 \begin_layout Standard
55239 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
55241 also supports Unicode output,
55242 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
55244 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
55245 installation supports Unicode),
55246 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
55247 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
55248 is quite incomplete,
55249 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
55253 (when \SpecialChar LyX
55254 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
55256 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
55257 -commands is not used,
55258 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
55259 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55260 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55262 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
55264 Both engines support Unicode natively.
55266 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
55269 \begin_inset space ~
55278 \begin_inset space ~
55286 \begin_inset space ~
55293 \begin_inset space ~
55297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55299 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
55305 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
55310 you might try out one of these new engines.
55315 \begin_layout Standard
55319 \begin_inset space ~
55324 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55325 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
55326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55334 The possible settings are:
55337 \begin_layout Description
55338 Default uses the language package that is selected in
55340 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
55341 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
55345 \begin_inset space ~
55349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55351 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
55359 \begin_layout Description
55360 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
55361 In many cases this will be
55366 \begin_inset Index idx
55371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55374 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55389 If the newer package
55394 \begin_inset Index idx
55399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55416 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55417 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55418 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
55420 this package will be used instead of
55427 \begin_layout Description
55429 \begin_inset space ~
55440 would be more appropriate.
55443 \begin_layout Description
55444 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
55445 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
55449 (for German texts),
55453 \begin_inset Newline newline
55458 usepackage{ngerman}
55461 \begin_layout Description
55462 None will not use a language package.
55463 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
55466 \begin_layout Standard
55467 Here is a list with the important encodings:
55470 \begin_layout Description
55472 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
55474 \begin_inset space ~
55478 \begin_inset space ~
55482 \begin_inset space ~
55490 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55496 \begin_inset Index idx
55501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55504 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55520 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55526 \begin_layout Description
55527 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
55528 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
55530 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
55532 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
55533 -commands are needed.
55535 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
55536 This is the same as the
55549 \begin_layout Description
55551 \begin_inset space ~
55555 \begin_inset space ~
55558 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
55561 \begin_layout Description
55563 \begin_inset space ~
55567 \begin_inset space ~
55570 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
55573 \begin_layout Description
55575 \begin_inset space ~
55578 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
55581 \begin_layout Description
55583 \begin_inset space ~
55587 \begin_inset space ~
55590 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
55591 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55592 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55595 \begin_layout Description
55597 \begin_inset space ~
55601 \begin_inset space ~
55604 8859-13) for Estonian,
55605 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55606 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
55609 \begin_layout Description
55611 \begin_inset space ~
55615 \begin_inset space ~
55618 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
55619 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55620 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55623 \begin_layout Description
55625 \begin_inset space ~
55629 \begin_inset space ~
55633 \begin_inset space ~
55636 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
55637 \begin_inset space ~
55643 \begin_layout Description
55645 \begin_inset space ~
55649 \begin_inset space ~
55653 \begin_inset space ~
55656 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
55663 Slovak and Slovenian
55666 \begin_layout Description
55668 \begin_inset space ~
55672 \begin_inset space ~
55675 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
55676 used especially on UNIX OSes,
55677 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55678 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55679 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55680 \begin_inset space ~
55684 \begin_inset space ~
55690 \begin_layout Description
55692 \begin_inset space ~
55696 \begin_inset space ~
55699 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
55700 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
55701 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55702 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55703 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55704 \begin_inset space ~
55708 \begin_inset space ~
55714 \begin_layout Description
55716 \begin_inset space ~
55720 \begin_inset space ~
55723 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55726 \begin_layout Description
55728 \begin_inset space ~
55732 \begin_inset space ~
55735 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55738 \begin_layout Description
55740 \begin_inset space ~
55744 \begin_inset space ~
55747 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55750 Serbian and Ukrainian
55753 \begin_layout Description
55755 \begin_inset space ~
55758 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55761 \begin_layout Description
55763 \begin_inset space ~
55766 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55769 \begin_layout Description
55771 \begin_inset space ~
55775 \begin_inset space ~
55778 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55781 \begin_layout Description
55783 \begin_inset space ~
55787 \begin_inset space ~
55793 \begin_layout Description
55795 \begin_inset space ~
55799 \begin_inset space ~
55802 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55803 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55806 \begin_layout Description
55808 \begin_inset space ~
55812 \begin_inset space ~
55818 \begin_layout Description
55820 \begin_inset space ~
55824 \begin_inset space ~
55827 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55828 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55834 \begin_inset Index idx
55839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55842 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55858 set the document language to
55863 \begin_layout Description
55865 \begin_inset space ~
55869 \begin_inset space ~
55872 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55873 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55880 set the document language to
55883 \begin_inset space ~
55889 \begin_layout Description
55891 \begin_inset space ~
55895 \begin_inset space ~
55898 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55899 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55905 \begin_inset Index idx
55910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55913 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55929 set the document language to
55934 \begin_layout Description
55936 \begin_inset space ~
55940 \begin_inset space ~
55943 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55944 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55951 set the document language to
55956 \begin_layout Description
55958 \begin_inset space ~
55962 \begin_inset space ~
55965 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55966 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55973 set the document language to
55978 \begin_layout Description
55980 \begin_inset space ~
55983 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55986 \begin_layout Description
55988 \begin_inset space ~
55992 \begin_inset space ~
55996 \begin_inset space ~
55999 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
56001 Maltese and Turkish
56004 \begin_layout Description
56006 \begin_inset space ~
56010 \begin_inset space ~
56014 \begin_inset space ~
56017 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
56026 Romanian and Slovenian,
56027 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
56030 \begin_layout Description
56032 \begin_inset space ~
56036 \begin_inset space ~
56042 \begin_layout Description
56044 \begin_inset space ~
56048 \begin_inset space ~
56051 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
56052 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
56055 \begin_layout Description
56057 \begin_inset space ~
56061 \begin_inset space ~
56064 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56070 \begin_inset Index idx
56075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56092 (for the languages Chinese,
56093 Japanese and Korean)
56094 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
56096 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
56097 with the default encoding (
56099 Unicode (utf8) [default]
56105 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
56106 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56111 \begin_layout Description
56113 \begin_inset space ~
56121 \begin_inset space ~
56124 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
56131 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56135 which use Unicode directly,
56136 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56143 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
56144 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56146 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56149 \begin_layout Description
56151 \begin_inset space ~
56155 \begin_inset space ~
56158 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56164 \begin_inset Index idx
56169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56187 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
56193 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
56195 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
56196 This used to be more comprehensive than
56199 \begin_inset space ~
56205 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
56210 \begin_layout Description
56212 \begin_inset space ~
56215 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56221 \begin_inset Index idx
56226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56229 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56245 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
56246 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
56247 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
56248 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
56249 with the default encoding (
56251 Unicode (utf8) [default]
56257 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
56258 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56263 \begin_layout Description
56265 \begin_inset space ~
56269 \begin_inset space ~
56273 \begin_inset space ~
56276 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
56277 \begin_inset space ~
56283 \begin_layout Description
56285 \begin_inset space ~
56289 \begin_inset space ~
56293 \begin_inset space ~
56296 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
56311 Spanish and Swedish;
56312 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
56315 \begin_layout Description
56317 \begin_inset space ~
56321 \begin_inset space ~
56325 \begin_inset space ~
56328 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
56329 but with the Euro currency sign,
56330 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
56333 \begin_layout Section
56335 \begin_inset Index idx
56340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56357 \begin_inset Index idx
56362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56364 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56379 \begin_inset Index idx
56384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56386 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56401 \begin_inset Index idx
56406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56408 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56425 \begin_layout Standard
56426 Here you can alter the font color for the
56435 \begin_inset space ~
56441 light grey)for the background color for the
56449 \begin_inset space ~
56460 sets the color back to the default.
56463 \begin_layout Standard
56464 Clicking any button showing
56472 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
56473 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
56476 \begin_layout Standard
56481 \begin_inset space ~
56486 font color and use the option
56489 \begin_inset space ~
56494 in the document settings under
56497 \begin_inset space ~
56503 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
56504 \begin_inset space ~
56508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56510 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56518 \begin_layout Standard
56519 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
56525 \begin_layout Standard
56529 \begin_inset space ~
56538 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
56540 \begin_inset space ~
56543 Code after a forced page break:
56546 \begin_layout Itemize
56547 For the page color:
56548 \begin_inset Newline newline
56555 pagecolor{color name}
56558 \begin_layout Itemize
56559 For the text color:
56560 \begin_inset Newline newline
56570 \begin_layout Standard
56571 You are restricted to one of
56613 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
56620 \begin_inset space ~
56626 \begin_inset Newline newline
56629 If you have changed a text or background color,
56630 you can use the following names to refer to them:
56633 \begin_layout Itemize
56639 \begin_inset Newline newline
56644 page_backgroundcolor
56647 \begin_layout Itemize
56651 \begin_inset space ~
56657 \begin_inset Newline newline
56665 \begin_layout Itemize
56669 \begin_inset space ~
56675 \begin_inset Newline newline
56683 \begin_layout Itemize
56687 \begin_inset space ~
56693 \begin_inset Newline newline
56701 \begin_layout Standard
56702 To see how to define and use custom colors,
56706 \begin_inset space ~
56714 \begin_inset space ~
56722 \begin_layout Section
56724 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56728 \begin_layout Standard
56730 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56731 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56732 \begin_inset space ~
56736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56738 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56747 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56748 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56751 \begin_layout Standard
56753 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56756 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56759 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56761 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56762 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56763 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56766 \begin_layout Section
56770 \begin_layout Standard
56771 Here you can adjust the
56775 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56779 as described in section
56780 \begin_inset space ~
56784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56786 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56792 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56796 \begin_layout Standard
56798 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56799 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56800 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56801 The most common one are:
56804 \begin_layout Description
56806 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56807 right Line numbers to the right margin
56810 \begin_layout Description
56812 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56813 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56817 \begin_layout Description
56819 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56820 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56823 \begin_layout Description
56825 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56826 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56829 \begin_layout Description
56831 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56832 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56835 \begin_layout Description
56837 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56839 \begin_inset space ~
56842 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56847 \begin_layout Section
56851 \begin_layout Standard
56852 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56858 \begin_inset Index idx
56863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56866 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56886 \begin_inset Index idx
56891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56913 \begin_inset Index idx
56918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56921 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56936 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56940 Sectioned bibliography
56942 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56948 \begin_inset Index idx
56953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56976 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56978 you can select a document-specific
56982 for the generation of the bibliography.
56983 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56984 \begin_inset space ~
56988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56990 reference "sec:Bibliography"
56998 \begin_layout Section
57002 \begin_layout Standard
57003 Here you can define the
57007 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
57008 \begin_inset space ~
57012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57014 reference "sec:Index"
57022 \begin_layout Section
57026 \begin_layout Standard
57027 The PDF properties are explained in section
57028 \begin_inset space ~
57032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57034 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
57042 \begin_layout Section
57046 \begin_layout Standard
57047 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
57048 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57054 \begin_inset Index idx
57059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57062 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57082 \begin_inset Index idx
57087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57090 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57110 \begin_inset Index idx
57115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57118 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57138 \begin_inset Index idx
57143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57146 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57166 \begin_inset Index idx
57171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57174 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57194 \begin_inset Index idx
57199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57202 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57222 \begin_inset Index idx
57227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57230 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57250 \begin_inset Index idx
57255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57278 \begin_inset Index idx
57283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57305 \begin_inset Index idx
57310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57313 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57328 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
57331 \begin_layout Description
57332 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
57333 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57334 -errors in formulas,
57335 ensure that you have this enabled.
57338 \begin_layout Description
57339 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
57340 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57341 -errors in formulas,
57342 ensure that you have this enabled.
57345 \begin_layout Description
57346 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
57350 \begin_inset space ~
57362 \begin_layout Description
57363 esint is used for special integral characters,
57367 \begin_inset space ~
57379 \begin_layout Description
57380 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
57392 \begin_layout Description
57393 mathtools is used for the math commands
57434 and labeled arrows,
57435 see the corresponding sections in the
57442 \begin_layout Description
57443 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
57446 Chemical Symbols and Equations
57455 \begin_layout Description
57456 stackrel is used for the math command
57474 \begin_layout Description
57475 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
57478 \begin_layout Description
57479 undertilde is used for the math command
57488 Accents for one Character
57497 \begin_layout Section
57499 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
57501 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
57507 \begin_layout Standard
57509 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
57510 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
57513 \begin_layout Standard
57515 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
57516 The float placement options
57517 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
57520 are described in the section
57523 \begin_inset space ~
57527 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
57529 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
57537 \begin_inset space ~
57545 \begin_layout Section
57549 \begin_layout Standard
57550 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
57552 Program Code Listings
57557 \begin_inset space ~
57565 \begin_layout Section
57569 \begin_layout Standard
57570 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
57579 set to be used and set the
57584 The itemize environment is described in section
57585 \begin_inset space ~
57589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57591 reference "sec:Itemize"
57599 \begin_layout Standard
57600 You can furthermore specify a
57603 \begin_inset space ~
57608 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57609 command of the desired character.
57610 For example to use the € sign,
57611 you have to insert the command
57618 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
57620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57624 \begin_inset space \space{}
57628 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
57638 To find the command for a math symbol,
57639 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
57642 \begin_layout Standard
57643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57652 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57653 -packages in the preamble (menu
57655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57656 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57659 \begin_inset space ~
57665 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
57669 usepackage{textcomp}
57672 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
57676 usepackage{amssymb}
57686 \begin_layout Section
57690 \begin_layout Standard
57691 Branches are described in section
57692 \begin_inset space ~
57696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57698 reference "sec:Branches"
57706 \begin_layout Section
57708 \change_deleted 5863208 1685691759
57710 \change_inserted 5863208 1685691762
57714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57716 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57723 \begin_layout Standard
57724 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57727 \begin_layout Description
57729 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57731 \begin_inset space ~
57736 Save transient properties
57738 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57739 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57743 \begin_layout Itemize
57745 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57746 the activation of change tracking
57749 \begin_layout Itemize
57751 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57752 the output of tracked changes
57755 \begin_layout Itemize
57757 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57758 the recording of the document directory path.
57761 \begin_layout Standard
57763 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57764 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57768 \begin_layout Description
57770 \begin_inset space ~
57774 \begin_inset space ~
57778 The format that is used when you enter
57779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57800 View Master Document
57801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57808 Update Master Document
57809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57816 menu or the toolbar.
57817 The default is set in
57819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57820 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57822 \begin_inset space ~
57825 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57830 \begin_inset space ~
57834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57836 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57844 \begin_layout Description
57846 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692088
57848 \begin_inset space ~
57852 \begin_inset space ~
57856 \begin_inset space ~
57859 programs If this is switched on,
57865 option which is needed with some packages.
57866 Note that this comes with security risks,
57867 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57868 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57872 \begin_layout Description
57874 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57876 \begin_inset space ~
57880 \begin_inset space ~
57883 Options offers settings for the
57891 \begin_layout Itemize
57895 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57897 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57899 \begin_inset space ~
57905 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57907 \begin_inset space ~
57911 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57917 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57919 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57920 settings for the menu
57922 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57926 \begin_inset space ~
57930 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57933 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57934 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57939 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57941 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57943 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57946 or a detailed description see section
57948 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57953 \begin_inset space ~
57959 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57963 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57967 \begin_layout Itemize
57969 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57972 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57974 determines whether so-called
57975 \begin_inset Quotes els
57979 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57983 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57984 \begin_inset Quotes els
57988 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57991 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57992 (such as sections or captions),
57993 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
57995 This setting is on by default,
57996 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
57998 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
57999 you can uncheck this.
58000 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
58002 just leave it checked.
58008 \begin_layout Description
58010 \begin_inset space ~
58014 \begin_inset space ~
58017 Options offers settings for the export format
58025 \begin_inset space ~
58030 will assure that the output follows exactly version
58031 \begin_inset space ~
58034 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
58038 \begin_inset space ~
58043 settings are described in detail in section
58045 Math Output in XHTML
58050 \begin_inset space ~
58059 \begin_inset space ~
58063 \begin_inset space ~
58068 is used for the size of equations in the output.
58069 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692496
58073 \begin_layout Description
58075 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692661
58077 \begin_inset space ~
58081 \begin_inset space ~
58084 Options offers settings for the export format
58087 The details for the options are described in the chapter
58093 Additional Features
58100 \begin_layout Description
58102 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58104 \begin_inset space ~
58109 Save transient properties
58111 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
58112 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
58116 \begin_layout Itemize
58118 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58119 the activation of change tracking
58122 \begin_layout Itemize
58124 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58125 the output of tracked changes
58128 \begin_layout Itemize
58130 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58131 the recording of the document directory path.
58134 \begin_layout Standard
58136 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58137 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
58140 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
58145 \begin_layout Description
58147 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
58149 \begin_inset space ~
58153 \begin_inset space ~
58157 \begin_inset space ~
58160 programs If this is switched on,
58166 option which is needed with some packages.
58167 Note that this comes with security risks,
58168 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
58173 \begin_layout Section
58181 \begin_layout Standard
58182 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
58183 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
58185 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
58187 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
58190 \begin_layout Standard
58191 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58192 -syntax is given in section
58193 \begin_inset space ~
58197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58199 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
58207 \begin_layout Chapter
58213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58215 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
58220 \begin_inset Index idx
58225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58234 \begin_layout Standard
58235 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
58237 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
58241 It has the following submenus.
58244 \begin_layout Section
58248 \begin_layout Subsection
58252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58253 User Interface File
58254 \begin_inset Index idx
58259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58261 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58276 \begin_inset Index idx
58281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58300 \begin_layout Standard
58301 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
58302 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
58310 \begin_layout Description
58315 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
58318 \begin_layout Description
58325 the menu entries in popup context menus
58328 \begin_layout Description
58333 specifies the toolbar buttons
58336 \begin_layout Standard
58337 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
58338 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
58341 \begin_layout Standard
58342 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
58356 entries must be finished with an explicit
58386 and in the case of the
58387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58399 The syntax for the entries is:
58402 \begin_layout Standard
58403 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58432 \begin_layout Standard
58434 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58437 All the \SpecialChar LyX
58438 -functions are listed in the menu
58440 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
58442 \begin_inset space ~
58450 \begin_layout Standard
58451 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58457 \begin_layout Standard
58459 assuming you use the menu
58461 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58464 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
58465 you can add the line
58468 \begin_layout Standard
58469 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58493 \begin_layout Standard
58495 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58510 to have the sixth bookmark.
58513 \begin_layout Standard
58517 \begin_inset space ~
58522 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
58523 's toolbar buttons.
58524 The currently available icon sets are compared in
58525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58528 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
58534 \change_inserted 258250489 1697053558
58538 \begin_layout Standard
58540 \change_inserted 258250489 1697054388
58544 \begin_inset space ~
58548 \begin_inset space ~
58553 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
58554 's user interface control elements.
58555 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
58556 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
58557 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
58558 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
58563 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58567 \begin_layout Standard
58570 Enable tool tips in main work area
58572 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
58575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58579 \begin_layout Standard
58584 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
58585 should display in the menu
58587 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58589 \begin_inset space ~
58595 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58601 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58605 \begin_layout Standard
58607 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58608 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58613 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58614 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58615 the text then appears centered.
58620 \begin_layout Subsection
58624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58628 \begin_layout Standard
58631 Restore window layouts and geometries
58634 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58638 \begin_layout Standard
58641 Restore cursor positions
58643 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
58646 \begin_layout Standard
58649 Load opened files from last session
58651 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58655 \begin_layout Standard
58658 Clear all session information
58660 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
58661 sessions (cursor positions,
58662 names of last opened documents,
58666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58670 name "subsec:Backup documents"
58675 \begin_inset Index idx
58680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58682 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58699 \begin_layout Standard
58702 Backup original documents when saving
58704 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
58705 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
58706 opened or when it was
58708 saved the last time.
58709 It is stored in the
58712 \begin_inset space ~
58718 \begin_inset space ~
58722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58724 reference "sec:Paths"
58729 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
58732 \begin_inset space ~
58738 The backup file has the file extension
58739 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
58743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58749 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
58753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58757 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
58758 and the same name than the original file.
58762 \begin_inset space ~
58768 the file has the full path in its file name,
58770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58785 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
58788 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
58794 \begin_layout Standard
58796 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
58799 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
58802 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
58803 These files which are stored as
58807 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
58808 Should \SpecialChar LyX
58809 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
58810 this file can be used as a resort.
58813 \begin_layout Standard
58815 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
58816 Please read section
58817 \begin_inset space ~
58821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58823 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
58827 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
58828 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
58833 \begin_layout Standard
58835 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
58842 you can specify the time between backup saves.
58847 \begin_layout Standard
58850 Save documents compressed by default
58852 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
58853 \begin_inset space ~
58857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58859 reference "subsec:Compressed"
58865 This applies to newly created documents only.
58866 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
58867 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
58871 \begin_layout Standard
58873 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
58876 Save the document directory path
58878 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
58880 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
58881 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58886 \begin_layout Standard
58888 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58889 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58890 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58891 The temporary file name is
58900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58901 Windows & work area
58904 \begin_layout Standard
58907 Open documents in tabs
58910 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58914 \begin_layout Standard
58919 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58926 \begin_inset space ~
58930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58932 reference "sec:Paths"
58937 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58946 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58948 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58949 instance is created for each file.
58952 \begin_layout Standard
58955 Single close-tab button
58958 there will only be one close button (
58968 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58969 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58970 Regardless of this option,
58971 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
58974 \begin_layout Standard
58975 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58984 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
58985 before the change takes effect.
58993 \begin_layout Standard
58998 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
58999 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
59001 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
59005 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
59006 and only want to close the view in once instance.
59009 \begin_layout Subsection
59011 \begin_inset Index idx
59016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59018 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59035 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
59042 \begin_layout Standard
59043 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
59047 \begin_layout Standard
59048 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59057 This section only deals with the fonts
59061 the \SpecialChar LyX
59063 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
59064 and set in the menu
59066 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
59067 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
59078 \begin_layout Standard
59098 (depends on the system) as its
59101 \begin_inset space ~
59117 \begin_layout Standard
59118 You can change the font size with the
59125 \begin_layout Standard
59130 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
59132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59135 points have the size of 1
59136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59141 \begin_inset space ~
59145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59147 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
59153 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
59154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59158 The sizes are explained in detail in section
59159 \begin_inset space ~
59163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59165 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
59173 \begin_layout Subsection
59175 \begin_inset Index idx
59180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59198 \begin_inset Index idx
59203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59205 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59222 \begin_layout Standard
59223 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
59224 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
59231 \begin_layout Standard
59232 By checking the option
59236 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
59244 \begin_inset space ~
59248 \begin_inset space ~
59253 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
59256 \begin_layout Subsection
59258 \begin_inset Index idx
59263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59265 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59282 \begin_layout Standard
59283 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
59287 \begin_layout Standard
59292 enables previewing snippets of your document.
59293 This feature is described in section
59294 \begin_inset space ~
59298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59300 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
59308 \begin_layout Standard
59309 Checking the option
59312 \begin_inset space ~
59316 \begin_inset space ~
59320 \begin_inset space ~
59325 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
59328 \begin_layout Section
59330 \begin_inset Index idx
59335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59354 \begin_layout Subsection
59358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59362 \begin_layout Standard
59365 Cursor follows scrollbar
59367 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
59370 \begin_layout Standard
59371 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
59372 If you set the value to zero,
59373 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
59376 \begin_layout Standard
59379 Scroll below end of document
59381 is self-explanatory.
59384 \begin_layout Standard
59385 In \SpecialChar LyX
59386 one can jump from word to word by pressing
59393 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
59395 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
59396 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
59397 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
59401 \begin_layout Standard
59403 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
59406 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
59408 is only relevant in documents that
59414 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
59422 markup) with this option selected.
59423 It the option is not selected,
59424 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
59425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59430 \begin_inset Quotes els
59434 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59438 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
59439 dissolving from insets.
59450 \begin_inset Quotes els
59454 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59457 notwithstanding the state of this option.
59462 \begin_layout Standard
59465 Sort environments alphabetically
59467 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59470 \begin_layout Standard
59473 Group environments by their category
59475 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59478 \begin_layout Standard
59483 options determine the editing style for math macros,
59493 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
59497 \begin_layout Standard
59499 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59502 Search drive for cited files
59504 allows \SpecialChar LyX
59505 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
59508 \begin_inset space ~
59512 \begin_inset space ~
59516 \begin_inset space ~
59520 \begin_inset space ~
59523 Content\SpecialChar ldots
59526 context menu on a citation.
59530 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
59532 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59535 field determines the search pattern.
59537 \begin_inset space ~
59541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59543 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
59553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59555 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59559 \begin_layout Standard
59561 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59562 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
59567 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
59568 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
59569 the text then appears centered.
59574 \begin_layout Subsection
59576 \begin_inset Index idx
59581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59588 \begin_inset Index idx
59593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59612 \begin_layout Standard
59617 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
59619 Several binding files are available,
59623 \begin_layout Description
59624 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
59627 \begin_layout Description
59628 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
59639 \begin_layout Description
59640 mac.bind a set of bindings for
59643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59651 \begin_layout Standard
59652 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
59658 and binding files for special languages.
59659 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
59661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59665 \begin_inset space \space{}
59669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59677 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
59678 in a certain language,
59680 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
59683 \begin_layout Standard
59684 Some binding files,
59690 only have a limited scope.
59691 When looking at the end of the file
59696 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
59699 \begin_layout Standard
59703 \begin_inset space ~
59707 \begin_inset space ~
59712 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
59715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59719 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
59724 \begin_inset Index idx
59729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59731 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59748 \begin_layout Standard
59749 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
59750 functions and the bound shortcuts.
59751 To find functions easily,
59752 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
59754 Show key-bindings containing
59757 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
59758 Insert there for example as keyword
59759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59766 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
59767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59776 one function can have more than one shortcut.
59777 All \SpecialChar LyX
59778 functions are also listed in the file
59783 that you will find in the
59790 \begin_layout Standard
59792 to add the shortcut
59801 select the function and press the
59806 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
59807 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
59810 \begin_layout Standard
59811 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
59812 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
59813 Function definition with “
59816 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
59818 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
59823 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
59825 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
59828 \begin_layout Standard
59829 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
59833 \begin_layout Standard
59834 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
59835 The syntax of the entries is:
59838 \begin_layout Standard
59844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59863 \begin_layout Standard
59866 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
59867 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
59868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59901 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59902 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59903 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59904 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59909 you needed to specify it as
59914 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59915 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59917 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59920 \begin_layout Subsection
59922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59924 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59929 \begin_inset Index idx
59934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59941 \begin_inset Index idx
59946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59965 \begin_layout Standard
59966 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59967 For the case where this is not possible,
59969 provides keyboard maps.
59972 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
59976 \begin_inset space ~
59980 \begin_inset space ~
59985 and select the keyboard map file named
59992 \begin_layout Standard
60007 you can select the first and second with
60010 arg "keymap-primary"
60016 arg "keymap-secondary"
60019 respectively or toggle between them with
60022 arg "keymap-toggle"
60028 \begin_layout Standard
60029 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
60032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60038 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
60046 \begin_layout Standard
60047 You can also specify the mouse
60049 Wheel scrolling speed
60052 The standard value is 1.0;
60053 higher values speed up the scrolling,
60054 lower ones slow it down.
60057 Middle mouse button pasting
60059 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
60062 \begin_layout Standard
60070 \begin_inset space ~
60074 \begin_inset space ~
60080 you can select a key for zooming.
60081 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
60082 the text is zoomed.
60085 \begin_layout Subsection
60089 \begin_layout Standard
60090 Input completion is described in section
60091 \begin_inset space ~
60095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60097 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
60105 \begin_layout Section
60107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60114 \begin_inset Index idx
60119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60126 \begin_inset Index idx
60131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60133 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60150 \begin_layout Standard
60151 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
60152 are normally determined during the installation.
60153 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
60156 \begin_layout Description
60158 \begin_inset space ~
60161 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
60162 's working directory.
60163 It is the default when you
60175 \begin_inset space ~
60183 \begin_layout Description
60185 \begin_inset space ~
60188 templates This directory
60189 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
60190 contains the templates that are shown
60191 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
60192 will be opened when you use the menu
60193 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
60198 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60200 \begin_inset space ~
60204 \begin_inset space ~
60212 \begin_layout Description
60214 \begin_inset space ~
60217 files This directory
60218 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
60219 will be opened when you use the
60220 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
60221 contains the example files that are listed in
60224 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
60233 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60235 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
60237 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
60243 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
60245 \begin_inset Newline newline
60249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
60252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60262 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
60263 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
60273 \begin_layout Description
60275 \begin_inset space ~
60279 \begin_inset Index idx
60284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60300 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
60301 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
60302 \begin_inset space ~
60306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60308 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60318 will be used to save the backups.
60319 \begin_inset Newline newline
60322 Backup files have the ending
60323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60333 \begin_layout Description
60335 \begin_inset space ~
60338 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
60339 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
60341 \begin_inset Newline newline
60349 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
60355 You can edit this file with the program
60364 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
60365 in its preferences under
60368 \begin_inset space ~
60374 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
60379 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
60381 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
60388 and \SpecialChar LyX
60389 need to be running the same time.
60390 \begin_inset Newline newline
60393 The pipe is also used for the
60399 \begin_inset space ~
60403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60405 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60411 \begin_inset Newline newline
60414 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
60415 Server-Pipe on Windows,
60416 you must use this pipe name:
60417 \begin_inset Newline newline
60433 \begin_layout Description
60435 \begin_inset space ~
60438 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
60441 \begin_layout Description
60443 \begin_inset space ~
60446 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
60447 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60450 \begin_layout Description
60452 \begin_inset space ~
60455 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
60460 You only need to specify it if you are using
60464 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60465 For \SpecialChar LyX
60470 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
60473 \begin_layout Description
60475 \begin_inset space ~
60478 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
60479 When \SpecialChar LyX
60480 needs to use an external program,
60481 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
60482 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
60484 so you normally don't have to modify it.
60486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60494 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
60497 \begin_layout Description
60499 \begin_inset space ~
60502 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
60503 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
60504 code or in the document preamble.
60505 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
60506 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
60507 If files are included,
60508 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
60509 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
60511 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
60512 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
60515 \begin_layout Section
60519 \begin_layout Standard
60520 Here you can insert your
60529 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
60530 as described in section
60531 \begin_inset space ~
60535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60537 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
60543 to mark changes you make as yours.
60546 \begin_layout Section
60548 \begin_inset Index idx
60553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60555 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60570 \begin_inset Index idx
60575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60577 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60594 \begin_layout Subsection
60596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60598 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
60605 \begin_layout Description
60607 \begin_inset space ~
60611 \begin_inset space ~
60614 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
60616 You can find its actual translation status here:
60618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60620 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
60626 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
60630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60632 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
60633 LaTeX Language Support
60638 \begin_layout Description
60640 \begin_inset space ~
60643 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
60644 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
60645 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
60646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60662 The most widespread language package is
60667 \begin_inset Index idx
60672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60690 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
60692 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
60693 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
60694 come with the alternative language package
60699 \begin_inset Index idx
60704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60707 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60721 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
60723 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
60728 The available selections are described in section
60729 \begin_inset space ~
60733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60735 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
60743 \begin_layout Description
60745 \begin_inset space ~
60749 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
60750 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
60751 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
60753 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
60757 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
60761 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
60763 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
60767 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
60768 that is used to switch to a different language
60769 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
60770 to start the package
60774 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
60775 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
60779 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
60780 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
60783 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60796 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
60804 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
60807 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
60809 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60814 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60832 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60833 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60841 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60846 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60852 this setting is ignored.
60857 \begin_layout Description
60859 \begin_inset space ~
60863 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
60870 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
60871 Use this if the language switch set in
60875 needs to be explicitly ended,
60880 's alternative command
60884 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
60885 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60888 end{otherlanguage*}
60892 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60895 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60896 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60902 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60904 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60908 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60914 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60920 this setting is ignored.
60925 \begin_layout Description
60927 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60929 \begin_inset space ~
60933 \begin_inset space ~
60936 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60939 \begin_layout Description
60941 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60943 \begin_inset space ~
60947 \begin_inset space ~
60950 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60956 \begin_layout Description
60958 \begin_inset space ~
60962 \begin_inset space ~
60966 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60968 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60971 this option is set,
60972 the languages used in the document will be added
60973 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
60976 to the document class options
60977 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
60978 rather than the language package options.
60979 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
60984 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
60985 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
60987 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
60988 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
60990 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
60994 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
60995 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
61004 \begin_layout Description
61006 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
61008 \begin_inset space ~
61012 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
61014 \begin_inset space ~
61018 \begin_inset space ~
61022 \begin_inset space ~
61028 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
61030 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
61033 this option is set,
61035 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
61036 the language switch defined in
61039 \begin_inset space ~
61044 is output at the beginning of the document,
61045 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
61046 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
61047 This might be needed if you use a non-default
61050 \begin_inset space ~
61055 or if a package resets the document language.
61057 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
61058 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
61059 documents start with the chosen document language.
61060 When this option is not set,
61064 \begin_inset space ~
61069 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61071 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
61074 \begin_inset space ~
61084 \begin_layout Description
61086 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
61088 \begin_inset space ~
61092 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
61094 \begin_inset space ~
61098 \begin_inset space ~
61102 \begin_inset space ~
61108 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
61112 \begin_inset space ~
61116 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
61117 Set document language explicitly
61123 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
61125 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
61132 \begin_inset space ~
61138 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
61140 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
61144 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
61146 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
61149 the end of the document.
61150 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
61154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61155 \paragraph_spacing single
61157 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
61163 \begin_layout Description
61165 \begin_inset space ~
61169 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
61171 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
61175 \begin_inset space ~
61179 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
61182 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
61184 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
61188 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
61191 in a language different
61192 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
61194 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
61197 the document language will be
61198 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
61199 marked (by default with a blue
61202 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
61204 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
61208 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
61212 \begin_layout Description
61214 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
61216 \begin_inset space ~
61220 \begin_inset space ~
61224 \begin_inset space ~
61229 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
61230 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
61231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61235 English and Hebrew:
61237 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
61243 \begin_layout Description
61245 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
61247 \begin_inset space ~
61251 \begin_inset space ~
61254 support Enables the use of languages,
61255 written from right to left (RTL),
61262 \begin_layout Description
61264 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
61266 \begin_inset space ~
61270 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
61272 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
61276 \begin_inset space ~
61280 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
61281 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
61282 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
61284 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
61288 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
61290 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
61291 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
61295 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61297 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
61301 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
61306 \begin_layout Standard
61311 means that the cursor
61312 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
61313 follows the logic of the text direction,
61314 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
61316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61320 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
61321 Hebrew embedded in English),
61322 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
61327 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
61328 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
61329 right arrow in this specific case always means:
61334 in text (even if this means:
61341 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61342 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
61343 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
61344 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
61345 since the cursor then follows a coherent
61346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61357 \begin_layout Standard
61359 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
61365 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
61367 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
61368 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
61373 ) when coming from the left.
61374 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
61375 at the expense of the text logic.
61376 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61377 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
61378 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
61383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61385 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
61389 \begin_layout Description
61391 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
61393 \begin_inset space ~
61397 \begin_inset space ~
61400 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
61402 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
61403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61409 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
61412 \begin_layout Description
61414 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
61416 \begin_inset space ~
61420 \begin_inset space ~
61423 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
61429 \begin_layout Subsection
61433 \begin_layout Standard
61434 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
61435 \begin_inset space ~
61439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61441 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
61449 \begin_layout Section
61453 \begin_layout Subsection
61455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61457 name "subsec:General-output"
61464 \begin_layout Description
61466 \begin_inset space ~
61469 search Commands that will be used for the menu
61471 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
61473 \begin_inset space ~
61479 For a detailed description see section
61481 Reverse DVI/PDF search
61486 \begin_inset space ~
61494 \begin_layout Description
61496 \begin_inset space ~
61499 Options Options for the program
61503 that is used for the export format
61509 \begin_inset space ~
61513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61515 reference "subsec:Export"
61521 Possible options are listed in the
61526 \begin_inset Newline newline
61530 \begin_inset Flex URL
61533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61535 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
61545 \begin_layout Description
61547 \begin_inset space ~
61551 \begin_inset space ~
61554 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
61556 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
61557 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
61559 \begin_inset space ~
61565 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
61568 \begin_layout Description
61570 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
61572 \begin_inset space ~
61576 \begin_inset Index idx
61581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61588 \begin_inset Index idx
61593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61609 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
61610 \begin_inset Newline newline
61614 \begin_inset Flex URL
61617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61619 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
61625 \begin_inset Newline newline
61628 For example the format
61629 \begin_inset Newline newline
61633 \begin_inset Newline newline
61636 prints the date as day/month/year.
61641 \begin_layout Description
61643 \begin_inset space ~
61647 \begin_inset space ~
61650 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
61651 is allowed to overwrite on export.
61654 \begin_layout Subsection
61660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61662 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
61667 \begin_inset Index idx
61672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61692 \begin_layout Description
61694 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
61696 \begin_inset space ~
61704 \begin_inset space ~
61708 \begin_inset space ~
61711 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
61716 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
61740 are used for Cyrillic.
61741 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
61743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61756 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
61757 sets up in the background.
61758 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
61763 \begin_layout Description
61765 \begin_inset space ~
61769 \begin_inset space ~
61773 \begin_inset space ~
61777 \begin_inset space ~
61780 options They only have an effect when the program
61784 is used as DVI-viewer,
61785 read its manual to find out more.
61788 \begin_layout Standard
61789 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
61790 But before you change something,
61791 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
61794 \begin_layout Description
61796 \begin_inset space ~
61799 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
61801 \begin_inset space ~
61805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61807 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
61815 \begin_layout Description
61817 \begin_inset space ~
61820 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
61822 \begin_inset space ~
61826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61828 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
61836 \begin_layout Description
61838 \begin_inset space ~
61841 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
61843 \begin_inset space ~
61847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61849 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
61857 \begin_layout Description
61863 \begin_inset space ~
61866 command Command for the program
61868 Check\SpecialChar TeX
61871 that is described in the section
61873 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
61878 Additional Features
61883 \begin_layout Standard
61884 There are additionally the following options:
61887 \begin_layout Description
61889 \begin_inset space ~
61893 \begin_inset space ~
61897 \begin_inset space ~
61901 \begin_inset space ~
61906 \begin_inset space ~
61909 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61928 to separate folders.
61929 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61931 \begin_inset Index idx
61936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61943 \begin_inset Index idx
61948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61950 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61967 \begin_layout Description
61969 \begin_inset space ~
61973 \begin_inset space ~
61977 \begin_inset space ~
61981 \begin_inset space ~
61985 \begin_inset space ~
61989 \begin_inset space ~
61992 changes Removes all manually set
61998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
61999 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
62001 \begin_inset space ~
62006 dialog when changing the document class.
62009 \begin_layout Section
62011 \begin_inset space ~
62015 \begin_inset Index idx
62020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62029 \begin_layout Subsection
62031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62033 name "subsec:Converters"
62038 \begin_inset Index idx
62043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62052 \begin_layout Standard
62053 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
62054 You can modify converters or create new ones.
62055 To modify a converter,
62057 change the entry of the
62064 \begin_inset space ~
62069 field and press the
62074 To create a new converter,
62075 select an existing one,
62076 select a different format in the
62079 \begin_inset space ~
62089 field and press the
62096 \begin_layout Standard
62099 Converter File Cache
62106 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
62108 Maximum Age (in days
62111 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
62112 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
62115 \begin_layout Standard
62116 More about converters,
62117 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
62118 is described in the section
62129 \begin_layout Subsection
62131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62133 name "sec:File-Formats"
62138 \begin_inset Index idx
62143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62150 \begin_inset Index idx
62155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62164 \begin_layout Standard
62165 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
62175 programs that should be used for certain formats.
62178 \begin_layout Standard
62179 You can also define the
62181 Default output format
62183 that is used when you use
62187 View Master Document
62191 Update Master Document
62197 menu or the toolbar.
62200 \begin_layout Standard
62201 More about formats and their options is described in the section
62212 \begin_layout Standard
62213 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
62214 's temporary directory,
62215 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
62216 This is done by specifying a
62221 More about this is described in the section
62232 \begin_layout Chapter
62233 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
62235 \begin_inset Index idx
62240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62249 name "chap:Units-available-in"
62256 \begin_layout Standard
62258 \begin_inset space ~
62262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
62264 reference "tab:Units"
62269 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
62270 and used in this documentation.
62273 \begin_layout Standard
62274 \begin_inset Float table
62281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62282 \begin_inset Caption Standard
62284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62300 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
62306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62308 \begin_inset Tabular
62309 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
62310 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
62311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
62312 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
62313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
62315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62466 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
62470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62737 scaled point (65536
62738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62805 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
62810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62929 % of original image width
62934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63018 \begin_layout Standard
63019 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63022 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
63029 \begin_layout Bibliography
63030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63031 LatexCommand bibitem
63038 The \SpecialChar LyX
63041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63044 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
63050 \begin_inset Newline newline
63054 \begin_inset Flex URL
63057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63059 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
63067 \begin_layout Bibliography
63068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63069 LatexCommand bibitem
63070 key "latexcompanion"
63075 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
63078 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
63079 Companion Second Edition.
63086 \begin_layout Bibliography
63087 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63088 LatexCommand bibitem
63094 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
63098 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
63106 \begin_layout Bibliography
63107 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63108 LatexCommand bibitem
63119 A Document Preparation System.
63127 \begin_layout Bibliography
63128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63129 LatexCommand bibitem
63139 The \SpecialChar TeX
63147 \begin_layout Bibliography
63148 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63149 LatexCommand bibitem
63155 The \SpecialChar TeX
63157 \begin_inset Newline newline
63161 \begin_inset Flex URL
63164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63166 https://ctan.org/topic
63174 \begin_layout Bibliography
63175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63176 LatexCommand bibitem
63182 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
63184 \begin_inset Newline newline
63188 \begin_inset Flex URL
63191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63193 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
63201 \begin_layout Bibliography
63202 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63203 LatexCommand bibitem
63210 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63212 name "Documentation"
63213 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
63220 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63224 \begin_inset Newline newline
63228 \begin_inset Flex URL
63231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63233 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
63241 \begin_layout Bibliography
63242 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63243 LatexCommand bibitem
63250 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63252 name "Documentation"
63253 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
63258 how to use the program
63260 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63264 \begin_inset Newline newline
63268 \begin_inset Flex URL
63271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63273 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
63281 \begin_layout Bibliography
63282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63283 LatexCommand bibitem
63290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63292 name "Documentation"
63293 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
63298 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63304 \begin_inset Index idx
63309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63312 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63327 \begin_inset Newline newline
63331 \begin_inset Flex URL
63334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63336 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
63344 \begin_layout Bibliography
63345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63346 LatexCommand bibitem
63353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63355 name "Documentation"
63356 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
63361 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63367 \begin_inset Index idx
63372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63375 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63390 \begin_inset Newline newline
63394 \begin_inset Flex URL
63397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63399 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
63407 \begin_layout Bibliography
63408 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63409 LatexCommand bibitem
63416 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63418 name "Documentation"
63419 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
63429 \begin_inset Newline newline
63433 \begin_inset Flex URL
63436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63438 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
63446 \begin_layout Bibliography
63447 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63448 LatexCommand bibitem
63449 key "makeindex-man"
63455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63458 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
63468 \begin_inset Newline newline
63472 \begin_inset Flex URL
63475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63477 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
63483 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
63487 \begin_layout Bibliography
63489 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
63490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63491 LatexCommand bibitem
63498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63500 name "Documentation"
63501 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
63511 \begin_inset Newline newline
63515 \begin_inset Flex URL
63518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63520 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
63522 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
63534 \begin_layout Bibliography
63535 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63536 LatexCommand bibitem
63543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63545 name "Documentation"
63546 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
63556 \begin_inset Newline newline
63560 \begin_inset Flex URL
63563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63565 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
63573 \begin_layout Bibliography
63574 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63575 LatexCommand bibitem
63582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63584 name "Documentation"
63585 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
63590 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
63592 \begin_inset Newline newline
63596 \begin_inset Flex URL
63599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63601 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
63609 \begin_layout Bibliography
63610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63611 LatexCommand bibitem
63618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63620 name "Documentation"
63621 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
63626 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63632 \begin_inset Index idx
63637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63640 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63655 \begin_inset Newline newline
63659 \begin_inset Flex URL
63662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63664 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
63672 \begin_layout Bibliography
63673 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63674 LatexCommand bibitem
63681 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63683 name "Documentation"
63684 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
63689 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63695 \begin_inset Index idx
63700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63703 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63718 \begin_inset Newline newline
63722 \begin_inset Flex URL
63725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63727 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
63735 \begin_layout Bibliography
63736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63737 LatexCommand bibitem
63744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63746 name "Documentation"
63747 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
63752 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63758 \begin_inset Index idx
63763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63766 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63781 \begin_inset Newline newline
63785 \begin_inset Flex URL
63788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63790 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
63798 \begin_layout Bibliography
63799 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63800 LatexCommand bibitem
63807 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63809 name "Documentation"
63810 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
63815 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63821 \begin_inset Index idx
63826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63829 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63844 \begin_inset Newline newline
63848 \begin_inset Flex URL
63851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63853 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
63861 \begin_layout Bibliography
63862 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63863 LatexCommand bibitem
63870 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63872 name "Documentation"
63873 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
63878 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63884 \begin_inset Index idx
63889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63892 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63907 \begin_inset Newline newline
63911 \begin_inset Flex URL
63914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63916 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63924 \begin_layout Bibliography
63925 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63926 LatexCommand bibitem
63933 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63935 name "Documentation"
63936 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63941 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63947 \begin_inset Index idx
63952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63970 \begin_inset Newline newline
63974 \begin_inset Flex URL
63977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63979 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
63987 \begin_layout Bibliography
63988 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63989 LatexCommand bibitem
63996 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63998 name "Documentation"
63999 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
64004 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
64010 \begin_inset Index idx
64015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64018 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
64021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64033 \begin_inset Newline newline
64037 \begin_inset Flex URL
64040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64042 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
64050 \begin_layout Bibliography
64051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64052 LatexCommand bibitem
64059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64061 name "Documentation"
64062 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
64067 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
64073 \begin_inset Index idx
64078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64081 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
64084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64096 \begin_inset Newline newline
64100 \begin_inset Flex URL
64103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64105 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
64113 \begin_layout Bibliography
64114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64115 LatexCommand bibitem
64122 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64125 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
64130 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64132 \begin_inset Newline newline
64136 \begin_inset Flex URL
64139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64141 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
64149 \begin_layout Bibliography
64150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64151 LatexCommand bibitem
64158 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64161 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
64166 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64168 \begin_inset Newline newline
64172 \begin_inset Flex URL
64175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64177 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
64185 \begin_layout Bibliography
64186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64187 LatexCommand bibitem
64194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64197 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
64202 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64203 for Cyrillic languages:
64204 \begin_inset Newline newline
64208 \begin_inset Flex URL
64211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64213 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
64221 \begin_layout Bibliography
64222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64223 LatexCommand bibitem
64230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64233 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
64238 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64240 \begin_inset Newline newline
64244 \begin_inset Flex URL
64247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64249 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
64257 \begin_layout Bibliography
64258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64259 LatexCommand bibitem
64266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64269 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
64274 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64276 \begin_inset Newline newline
64280 \begin_inset Flex URL
64283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64285 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
64293 \begin_layout Bibliography
64294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64295 LatexCommand bibitem
64302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64305 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
64310 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64312 \begin_inset Newline newline
64316 \begin_inset Flex URL
64319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64321 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
64329 \begin_layout Standard
64330 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
64337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64365 \begin_inset Note Note
64368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64375 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
64376 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
64384 \begin_layout Standard
64385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
64386 LatexCommand bibtex
64387 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
64388 options "biblio/alphadin"
64395 \begin_layout Standard
64396 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
64400 \begin_layout Standard
64404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64410 pagedeclaration}[1]{
64413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64420 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
64428 \begin_inset Note Note
64431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64432 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
64434 \begin_inset space ~
64438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
64440 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
64453 \begin_layout Standard
64454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
64455 LatexCommand printnomenclature
64461 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
64462 LatexCommand printindex